Dell 1355 Color Laser Manual

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction
Color Printer
User's Guide
www.dell.com | support.dell.com
This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com
Contents
Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color

Printer ............................................................1
User's Guide .................................................1
Before Beginning .......................................19
A Notes, Notices, and Cautions . . . . . . . . . 21
1 Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer

User's Guide 23
2 Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 Product Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4 About the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Contents 1

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Securing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting Up Printer (Printer Setup) ...........39
5 Removing Packaging Material . . . . . . . . 41
6 Connecting Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network . . . . . . 44
Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Turning On the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7 Setting the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel . . . . . 51
Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode) . . . . . . . . 53

The Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
The Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Verifying the IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page . . . . 57

2 Contents

The Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8 Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 59
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 66
9 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running

Windows 69
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status (For Network Connection
Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Disabling the firewall before installing your printer 70
Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Direct Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

For installing host-based printer driver . . . . . . 71
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver 71
Network Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network . . . . 74
Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network . . . 79
Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color

Printer Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Settings 86
Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Settings 88
Setting up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your
Computer (When you need to setup your wireless connectivity
with your computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting Up for Shared Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Contents 3

Point and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Peer-to-Peer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running

Macintosh 117
Installing the Drivers and Software . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s) 117
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11 . . . . . . . 118
Using Your Printer ...................................121
11 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . 123

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . 125
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . 126

Setting Up From Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setting Up From Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . 129
Page Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Top Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Left Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Right Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . 133

Details of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Printer Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Print Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4 Contents

Print Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12 Print Media Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Paper Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Recommended Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Unacceptable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Selecting Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead . . . . 192
Printing on Letterhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Loading Letterhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Identifying Print Media and Specifications . . . . . . 196

Supported Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Supported Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Paper Type Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13 Loading Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Print Media Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 202

Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 207
Contents 5

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 211

Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 214
Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer Driver Only) 218

The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) . . . . . . . . . . 218
The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) . . . . . . . . . . 219
Using the Output Tray Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Using the Operator Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Printing a Panel Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

The Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 227
15 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tips for Successful Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tips on Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Avoiding Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Sending a Job to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Canceling From the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . 230
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows 230
6 Contents

Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device . . . . . . 231
Supported File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Printing a Report Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Printing a System Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . 232
The Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings 233
Adjusting the Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
16 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Loading Paper for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Preparing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Making Copies From the Document Glass . . . . . . . 235
Making Copies From the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting Copy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Collated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Reduce/Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Original Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Lighter/Darker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Auto Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Multiple-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Margin Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Margin Left/Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Margin Middle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Contents 7

Changing the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option . . . . . . . . . 250
17 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Scanning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Scanning From the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver 257
Using a Scanner on the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Confirming a Login name and Password . . . . . . 261
Specifying a Destination to Store the Document . 262
Configuring the Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . 271
Sending the Scanned File on the Network . . . . . 279
Scanning to USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image . . . . . . 281

Setting an E-Mail Address Book . . . . . . . . . . 281
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File . . . . . 282
18 Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters . . . . 285
Keypad Letters and Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Changing Numbers or Names . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Inserting a Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Configuring Fax Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Setting Your Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
8 Contents

Setting the Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Setting the Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Changing the Clock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Setting Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Speaker Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Ringer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Specifying the Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Changing the Fax Settings Options . . . . . . . . 290
Available Fax Settings Options . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Advanced Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Loading an Original Document on the ADF . . . . 296
Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass 296
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Document Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Lighter/Darker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Sending a Fax Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Sending a Fax Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Confirming Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Sending a Delayed Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax) . . . . . . . 303

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Receiving a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

About Receiving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . 308
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode . . 309
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode 309
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans/Fax
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Contents 9

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone 309
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode . . . . . . 310
Receiving Faxes in the Memory . . . . . . . . . . 311
Polling Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Automatic Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . 311
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . 312
Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Setting Group Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Editing Group Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)
316
Printing an Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Other Ways to Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Using the Secure Receiving Mode . . . . . . . . . 316
Using an Answering Machine . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Using a Computer Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Changing Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Know Your Printer ...................................321
19 Understanding the Tool Box Menus . . . 323

Printer Settings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Printer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Menu Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
10 Contents

TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Defaults Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Printer Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Paper Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Adjust BTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Adjust Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Registration Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Adjust Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Reset Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Non-Dell Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
BTR Refresh Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Web Link Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Scan Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fax Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Copy Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Chart Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Environment Sensor Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Clean Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Refresh Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Resetting Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Contents 11

20 Understanding the Printer Menus . . . . . 359
Defaults Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Copy Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Scan Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Fax Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
USB Print Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

MPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Reports/List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Color Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Protocol Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Fax Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Admin Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Secure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Scan to EMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Panel Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Panel Lock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Enabling the Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
12 Contents

Disabling the Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Resetting Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
21 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows

Only) 409
Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Status Monitor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Dell Supplies Management System . . . . . . . . 409
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Quick Launch Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Address Book Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
ScanButton Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
ScanDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
User Setup Disk Creating Tool . . . . . . . . . . . 413
22 Understanding Printer Messages . . . . . 415
23 Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD) 425

Adding Roles of Print Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard 426
24 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Operating System Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Contents 13

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and

Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Copier Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Scanner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Facsimile Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Maintaining Your Printer .......................437
25 Maintaining Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Determining the Status of Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Conserving Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Storing Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Replacing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Removing the Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . 441
Installing a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Cleaning Inside the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor . . . . 448
Adjusting Color Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
14 Contents

Performing Auto Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Printing the Color Registration Chart . . . . . . . 451
Determining Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Entering Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Cleaning the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
26 Clearing Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Avoiding Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . 460
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer . . . 465
Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer . . . 467
Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray . . . . . . . 470
Troubleshooting .......................................475
27 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Basic Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

The output is too light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side 481
Contents 15

Random spots/Blurred images . . . . . . . . . . . 482
The entire output is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Streaks appear on the output . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Pitched color dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Vertical blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Ghosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Auger mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Wrinkled/Stained paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
The top margins is incorrect . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Color registration is out of alignment . . . . . . . 490
Protrudent / Bumpy paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Misfeed jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Multi-feed jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Copy Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Fax Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Scanning Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems . . . . . . . . 499
Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Contacting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Appendix ...................................................501
B Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Dell Technical Support Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
16 Contents

Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Warranty and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Recycling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Contents 17

18 Contents

Before Beginning
19

20

Notes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your printer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data
and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury,
or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

© 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft,
Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Adobe is either a registered
trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by
Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such
intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This
product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright ©
2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES
software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright ©
1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little
cms): Copyright © 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities
claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in
trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
____________________
Notes, Notices, and Cautions 21

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication,
or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii)
of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
November 2010 Rev. A00
22 Notes, Notices, and Cautions

1
Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw
Multifunction Color Printer User's
Guide
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and
operation of your printer. For information on other documentation included
with your printer, see "Finding Information" on page 25.
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
1 Double-click the icon on your desktop.
If you cannot find the icon on your desktop, follow the procedure below.
a Navigate to x:\abc\Dell Printers\Dell 1355 Multifunction Color
Printer\Reorder, where x:\abc is the location where the printer
software is installed.
b Click the file dl1armm.exe.
c Click File on the toolbar.
d Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click
Desktop(create shortcut) on the submenu that appears.
2 Visit the Dell Printer Supplies website at www.dell.com/supplies, or order

Dell printer supplies by phone.
For best service, have your Dell printer Service Tag ready.
To locate the Service Tag of your printer, see "Express Service Code and
Service Tag" on page 27.
Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide 23

24 Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide

2
Finding Information
NOTE: The USB cable and the Ethernet cable are not shipped with your printer.
What are you looking for? Find it here

• Drivers for my printer Drivers and Utilities CD
• My User's Guide
The Drivers and Utilities CD contains setup video,

documentation, and drivers for your printer. You can
use the CD to install/re-install drivers or access your
setup video and documentation.
Readme files may be included on your CD to provide

last-minute updates about technical changes to your
printer or advanced technical reference material for
experienced users or technicians.
• How to use my printer Quick Reference Guide
Finding Information 25

• Safety information Product Information Guide
• Warranty information
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in

your Product Information Guide prior to setting up and
operating your printer.
How to set up my printer Setup diagram
Troubleshooting "Troubleshooting" on page 477
26 Finding Information

Express Service Code and
Service Tag Service Tag Express Service Code
xxxxxxx 000 000 000 00
The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located

inside the side door of your printer.
• Latest drivers for my printer Go to support.dell.com
• Answers to technical service support.dell.com provides several online tools,
and support questions including:
• Documentation for my • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips,
printer articles from technicians, and online courses
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for
components, such as printer driver
• Customer Care — Contact information, order
status, warranty, and repair information
• Downloads — Drivers
• Manuals — Printer documentation and product
specifications
Go to support.dell.com. Select your region and fill in
the requested details to access help tools and
information.
Finding Information 27

28 Finding Information

3
Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.
Scanning to a USB Storage Device Multiple-Up (2-in-1 Copy)
With Dell 1355cn/1355cnw N-up Print enables you to print multiple

Multifunction Color Printer, you don't pages on a single sheet of paper. This
need a PC to connect your USB storage feature allows you to reduce the paper
device to save the scanned data. Insert consumption.
your USB storage device in the port on For more information, see "Multiple-Up"
the printer, and save the scanned data on page 245.
directly to your USB storage device.
For more information, see "Scanning to
USB Storage Device" on page 280.
Product Features 29

2-Sided (Manual Duplex Print) Print From USB Memory
(USB Direct Print)
Manual Duplex Print is to print two or Print From USB Memory feature allows
more pages on the front and back you to print directly from your USB
side of a single sheet of paper manually. storage device without starting your
This feature allows you to reduce the computer. Without requiring you to
paper consumption. start your computer and an application,
For more information, see "Manual this feature allows quick printing with
Duplex Printing (Windows Printer simple procedures.
Driver Only)" on page 218. For more information, see "Direct Print
Using the USB Storage Device" on
page 231.
30 Product Features

Printing Through Wireless Connection
(Wireless Print)
The Wireless LAN feature on your

printer allows you to install the printer at
any location, and enables printing
without a wired connection to your
computer.
For more information, see "Configuring
Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw
Multifunction Color Printer Only)" on
page 85.
Product Features 31

32 Product Features

4
About the Printer
This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Color
Multifunction Printer.
Front View
1 2 3 4 5 6
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
1 Operator Panel 2 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

3 Document Feeder Tray 4 Document Output Tray
5 Toner Access Cover 6 Print Head Cleaning Rod
7 Power Switch 8 Front Cover
9 Paper Width Guides 10 Length Guide
11 MPF Extension 12 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
13 Front USB Port 14 Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
About the Printer 33

Rear View
1
12
11 2
10
9 3
8 4
7 6
1 ADF Cover 2 Ethernet Port

3 USB Port 4 Wall Jack Connector
5 Phone Connector 6 Security Slot
7 Rear Cover 8 Transfer Roller
9 Paper Chute 10 Paper Feed Roller
11 Transfer Belt 12 Fuser Release Lever
Space Requirements
Place the printer at a location such that there is adequate space for using the
printer feeder and covers.
34 About the Printer

100 mm/3.94 inches
596 mm/23.46 inches
132 mm/5.20 inches 262.5 mm/10.33 inches
410 mm/16.14 inches

379 mm/14.92 inches
338 mm/13.31 inches 292.5 mm/11.52 inches
To avoid irregular screen image or malfunctioning of your printer, avoid

placing the printer in direct sunlight with the single sheet feeder opened.

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
3
1 2
1 ADF Cover
2 Document Guides
3 Document Glass
4 Document Feeder Tray
Operator Panel
For more information on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on

page 223.
Securing the Printer

To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.

Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.
Security slot
For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.
Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked
printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser, launch the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to
order toner for your printer.
You can also order toner cartridges by the following method:
1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers  Additional Color Software
 Dell Supplies Management System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If ordering from the web:
a Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.
b Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
The Dell 1355 Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System
screen appears.
c Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK.
The Service Tag is located inside the toner access cover of your printer.

Dell supplies web site appears.
Service Tag Express Service Code

xxxxxxx 000 000 000 00
If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone
section.

Setting Up Printer
(Printer Setup)
39

40

5
Removing Packaging Material
1 Remove the packaging material from the printer.
2 Lift and open the document cover.
3 Remove the protective sheet from the ADF Glass.
Removing Packaging Material 41

42 Removing Packaging Material

6
Connecting Your Printer
Your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Color Multifunction Printer interconnection
cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type Connection specifications

Wireless IEEE 802.11b/802.11g
USB USB 2.0 compatible
Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX compatible
Wall jack connector RJ11
Phone connector RJ11
2
3
4
Connecting Your Printer 43

1 Ethernet Port
2 USB Port
3 Wall Jack Connector
4 Phone Connector
Connecting Printer to Computer or Network

Direct Connection
A local printer is a printer which is directly attached to your computer using
the USB cable. If your printer is attached to a network instead of your
computer, skip this section and go to "Network Connection" on page 45.
USB Cable
The following operating systems support USB connection:
• Microsoft® Windows® XP
• Microsoft Windows XP 64-bit Edition
• Windows Server® 2003
• Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2008
• Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
• Windows Server 2008 R2
• Windows Vista®
• Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
44 Connecting Your Printer

• Windows 7
• Windows 7 64-bit Edition
• Mac OS® X 10.4.11/10.5/10.6
To attach the printer to a computer:
1 Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are
turned off and unplugged from the power source/outlet.
2 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the
printer.
USB port
3 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.
NOTE: Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB connector available
on the keyboard.
Network Connection
To connect the printer to a network:
1 Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices have
been turned off and all cables have been disconnected.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable.

Ethernet port
NOTE: Connect the Ethernet cable, only if you need to setup a wired connection.
To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable
into the Ethernet port at the rear of the printer, and the other end to a LAN
drop or hub.
To setup a wireless connection, see "Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell
1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer Only)" on page 85.

Turning On the Printer
CAUTION: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
CAUTION: The printer should not be connected to a UPS system.
1 Connect the power cable to the wall jack connector on the rear of your
printer (see "Rear View" on page 34).
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the power source.

3 Turn on the printer.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions in the operator panel to configure the

initial settings of your printer.

Connecting the Telephone Line
NOTE: Do not connect your printer directly to a DSL (digital subscriber line). This
may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter.
Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.
1 Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the
other end to an active wall jack.
Wall jack connector
To the wall jack
2 Remove the blue plug from the phone connector.
Phone connector
Blue plug
3 To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the

telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector ( ).

Phone connector
To an external telephone
or answering machine
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany,

Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), and
you are supplied with a yellow terminator, insert the yellow terminator into
the phone connector ( ).
Phone connector
Yellow terminator


7
Setting the IP Address
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, and time when you
turn on printer for the first time.
When you turn on the printer, a wizard appears on the operator panel. Follow
the steps below to set the initial settings.
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Ready appears on the
operator panel in three minutes. After that, you can set the following initial setup by
enabling Power on Wizard on the operator panel or Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool if needed.
For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on
page 359.
For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool" on page 123.
1 Ensure that Please Select Language is highlighted, and then
select the language you want to use on the operator panel from the
following drop-down list, and then press the button.
English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska
2 Press the button to start setting the country.
Setting the IP Address 51

3 Ensure that Please Select Country is highlighted. Select your
country from the drop-down list, and then press the button.
4 Ensure that Please Select Time Zone is highlighted. Select the

appropriate time zone from the following drop-down list, and then press
the button.
UTC -12:00
UTC -11:00
UTC -10:00
UTC -09:00
UTC -08:00
UTC -07:00
UTC -06:00
UTC -05:00
UTC -04:00
UTC -03:30
UTC -03:00
UTC -02:00
UTC -01:00
UTC 00:00
UTC +01:00
UTC +02:00
UTC +03:00
UTC +03:30
UTC +04:00
UTC +04:30
UTC +05:00
UTC +05:30
UTC +05:45
UTC +06:00
52 Setting the IP Address

UTC +06:30
UTC +07:00
UTC +08:00
UTC +09:00
UTC +09:30
UTC +10:00
UTC +11:00
UTC +12:00
UTC +13:00
5 Press the button until Please Enter Date is highlighted. Specify

the current date, and then press the button.
6 Press the button until Please Enter Time is highlighted. Specify
the current time, and then press the button.
7 Press the button for Fax Setup.
If you want to skip the Fax Setup, press the (Start) button and then
restart the printer.
8 Press the button until Please Enter Fax Number is
highlighted. enter your fax number, and then press the button.
9 Press the button until Please Enter Name is highlighted. Enter a
name, and then press the button.
10 Press the button, and then restart the printer.
Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)

NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 Mode, use the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. To open the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the
link local address. To check a link local address, see "Printing and Checking the
Printer Settings Page" on page 57.
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are
delimited by a period and can include up to three digits in each section, for
example, 111.222.33.44.

Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance
issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is
normally done by a system administrator.
NOTE: Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may
be different. On Class A, for example, an IP address in the range from 0.0.0.0 to
127.255.255.255 will be assigned. For assignment of IP addresses, contact
your system administrator.
You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or using the tool
box.
The Operator Panel

For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on
page 223.
Ensure that Ready message appears on the LCD panel.
2 Press the (Menu) button.
3 Press the button until System is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the button.
5 Press the button until Network is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Press the button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the
button.
8 Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted, and then press the
button.
9 Ensure that Panel is highlighted, and then press the button.
10 Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted.
11 Press the button until IP Address is highlighted, and then press
the button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the IP address.
12 Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad.
13 Press the button.
The next three digits are highlighted.
14 Repeat step 12 and step 13 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and
then press the button.
15 Ensure that IP Address is highlighted.
16 Press the button until Subnet Mask is highlighted, and then press
the button.
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the subnet mask.
17 Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad.
19 Repeat step 17 and step 18 to set subnet mask, and then press the
button.
20 Press the button and ensure that Subnet Mask is highlighted.
21 Press the button until Gateway Address is highlighted, and then
press the button.
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the gateway address.
22 Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad.
24 Repeat step 22 and step 23 to set gateway address, and then press the
button.
25 Turn off and turn on the printer.
The Tool Box
NOTE: When you use IPv6 Mode for network printing, the Tool Box cannot be used
to assign an IP address.

1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers  Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer  Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer
drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.
4 Select the mode from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address.
5 Press the Apply New Settings button to take effect.
The IP address is assigned to your printer. To verify the setting, open the web
browser on any computer connected to the network and enter the IP address
into the address bar on the browser. If the IP address is set up correctly, the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool displays in your browser.
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer
drivers with installer. When you use the Network Installation feature, and the
Get IP Address is set to AutoIP on the operator panel menu, you can
set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer
selection window.
Verifying the IP Settings

1 Print the printer settings page.
See "Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page" on page 57.
2 Look under the TCP/IP heading on the printer settings page to ensure
that the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are appropriate.
To verify if the printer is active on the network, run the ping command in
your computer:
1 Click Start, and select Run.
2 Type cmd, and then press OK.
A black window is displayed.

3 Type ping xx.xx.xx.xx (where xx.xx.xx.xx is the IP address of
your printer).
4 Reply from the IP address denotes printer is active on the network.
Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page

Print the printer settings page and check your printer's IP address.
The Operator Panel

button.
3 Press the button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press
the button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
The system settings page is printed.
5 Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network on the
printer settings page. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes
to resolve the IP address automatically, and then print the system settings
page again.
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.
The Tool Box

NOTE:
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer drivers
are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page is displayed.
4 Click the Printer Settings button.
The printer settings page is printed.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign an IP address for your
printer, see "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.

8
Loading Paper
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the priority sheet inserter while a
printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.
NOTE: For printing envelopes, see "Loading Print Media" on page 201.
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder

(MPF)
1 Open the front cover by pulling out the instruction sheet.
2 Pull the priority sheet inserter (PSI) out.
Loading Paper 59

3 Remove the instruction sheet attached to the PSI with adhesive tape.
NOTE: Read the instruction sheet before you use the PSI.
4 Pull the length guide forward until it stops.
60 Loading Paper

5 Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.
6 Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum width.
Loading Paper 61

7 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
8 Load paper on the MPF with the top edge first and with the recommended
print side facing up.
62 Loading Paper

9 Adjust the width guides and length guides until they rest lightly against
the edges of the stack of print media.
10 Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.
Loading Paper 63

NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension
backward until it stops, and then pinch the length guide and slide it backward
until it touches print media.
64 Loading Paper

11 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on
the paper tray.
Loading Paper 65

12 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is
not standard plain paper. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the
MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter

(PSI)
1 Open the front cover.
2 Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper
tray.
66 Loading Paper

4 Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the
recommended print side facing up.
Loading Paper 67

5 Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the
stack of print media.
PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.
68 Loading Paper

9
Installing Printer Drivers on
Computers Running Windows
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status (For
Network Connection Setup)
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, print the printer
settings page to check the IP address of your printer.
The Operator Panel

button.
the button.
button.
5 Find the IP address under Wired Network/Wireless Network on the printer
settings page.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP
address automatically, and then print the system settings page again.
The Tool Box

1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Tool Box.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the
Select Printer window opens. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355cnw
Color MFP listed in Printer Name.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list on the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page appears.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see
"Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.
Disabling the firewall before installing your printer

NOTE: For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 or 3 must be installed.
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must disable
the firewall before installing the Dell printer software:
• Windows 7
• Windows Vista
• Windows Server 2008 R2
• Windows XP
1 Click Start Help and Support.
NOTE: For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 operating systems, if you
use Online Help, switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support
window.
2 In the Search box, type firewall and then press Enter.
In the list, click Turn Windows Firewall on or off and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
Enable the firewall after the installation of the Dell printer software is
complete.
Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to start Easy Setup
Navigator.
70 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows

NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start All Programs (for
Windows Vista and Windows 7) Accessories (for Windows Vista and
Windows 7) Run, and then type D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is
the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.
Direct Connection Setup

For installing host-based printer driver
1 Click Software Installation.
2 Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer
with a USB cable, and then turn the printer on.
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds
to the next page automatically.
NOTE: If the installation software does not automatically proceed to the next
page, click Install.
4 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
USB Printing
A personal printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server
using a USB. If your printer is attached to a network and not your computer,
see "Network Connection Setup" on page 74.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com/support.
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7,
Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 71

4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box. To use this printer as the default printer, select the check box
displayed under the Printer name. Click Next.
Installation starts.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise,
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test
page.
12 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
8 Click OK.
box.

To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box. Click Next.
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network
can find and use it. Click Next.
page.
13 Click Finish.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

2 Click Start Devices and Printers.
4 When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click Add a local or network
printer as an administrator.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise,
9 Click OK.
box, and then click Next.

page. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
14 Click Finish.
Network Connection Setup

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network
For installing host-based printer driver

2 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
4 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click
Next. If the target printer is not displayed on the list, click Refresh to
refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually.
You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select I am
setting up this printer on a server check box.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can
continue, you must enter a valid IP address.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows
Security Alert is displayed:
• Windows Vista
• Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition
• Windows 7
To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or
Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
5 Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.

a Enter the printer name.
b If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select
Share this printer with other computers on the network, and then
enter a share name that users can identify.
c If you want to set a printer as the default, select the Set this printer as
default check box.
6 Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click
Next. You can specify folders in which to install the Dell software and
documentation. To change the folders, click Browse.
7 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com/support.
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7,
Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click
Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device for Device type, and enter the IP address for
Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click
Continue.
9 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.

printer check box.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
page.
13 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click
Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click
Continue.

printer check box.
page.
14 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 R2
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by
name or TCP/IP address screen appears. Find your printer on this screen.
can find and use it.
11 Click Next.

printer check box.
13 Click Finish.
Windows 7 or Windows 7 64-bit Edition
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click
Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for
printer check box.
13 Click Finish.

NOTE: You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail
when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
For more information about E-Mail Alert, see "E-Mail Alert" on page 126.
Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network
Before Installation
Before you start remote installation, perform the following procedures.
Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista,
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows Server 2008:
1 Click Start  All Programs (for Windows Vista only)  Accessories (for
Windows Vista only)  Run.
2 Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration  Administrative Templates  Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select
Properties.
5 On the Setting tab, select Enabled, and then click OK.
6 Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1 Click Start  All Programs (for Windows 7 only)  Accessories (for
Windows 7 only)  Run.
2 Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration  Administrative Templates  Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select
Edit.
5 Select Enabled, and then click OK.

Share the Firewall File and Printer
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows
Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-
bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows XP:
1 Click start  Control Panel.
2 Select Security Center.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and
then click OK.
For Windows Vista:
1 Click Start  Control Panel.
2 Select Security.
4 Click Change settings.
5 Click Continue.
then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008:
2 Double-click Windows Firewall.
3 Click Change settings.
then click OK.
2 Select System and Security.
4 Click Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall.
5 If the check boxes under Allowed programs and features: are dimmed,
click Change settings, and then click Yes.

6 Check the Name check box. Home/Work (Private) or Public check box is
automatically selected according to your settings.
If File and Printer Sharing Properties dialog box appears, click OK.
7 Click OK.
Start Remote Registry

NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,
Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
2 Select System and Maintenance (System and Security for Windows 7).
3 Click Administrative Tools.
4 Double-click Services.
5 Click Continue (for Windows Vista only).
6 Right-click Remote Registry and select Start.
7 Right-click Remote Registry and select Properties.
8 Change Startup type: to Automatic, and then click OK.
Disable User Account Control

NOTE: Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to
virus attacks.
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008
R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.
For Windows Vista:
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
5 Click Continue.
6 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your
computer check box.
7 Click OK.

2 Double-click User Accounts.
3 Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
4 Click Continue.
5 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your
computer check box.
6 Click OK.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
4 Click Change User Account Control settings.
5 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6 Click Yes.
7 Click OK.
8 Click Yes.
For Windows 7:
2 Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
4 Click Change User Account Control Settings.
5 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6 Click Yes in User Account Control dialog box.

Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks
NOTE: This step is required when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition for the server computer.
For Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2
1 Click Start  Control Panel  Network and Internet  Network and
Sharing Center  Change advanced sharing settings.
2 To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other
computers on the network to share the files and folders on your computer,
click Turn on network discovery.
3 Click Save changes.
4 If you see the User Account Control dialog box, click Yes.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition:
1 Click Start  Network.
2 Right-click Network and select Properties.
The Network an Sharing Center screen appears.
3 Click the down arrow button next to either Network discovery.
4 To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other
computers on the network to share the files and folders on your computer,
click Turn on network discovery.
5 Click Apply.
6 If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
Disable Simple File Sharing

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, and Windows XP 64-bit Edition.
2 Select Appearance and Themes.
3 Select Folder Options.
4 On the View tab, clear the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check
box, and then click OK.

6 Select Performance and Maintenance.
7 Select Administrative Tools.
8 Double-click Local Security Policy.
9 Click Local Policies  Security Options.
10 Right-click Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts
and select Properties.
11 Ensure that Classic - local users authenticate as themselves is selected.
12 Click OK.
Installing the Printer Driver

NOTE: Installation on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic,
Windows Vista Home Premium, Windows Vista x64 Home Basic, Windows Vista x64
Home Premium, Windows 7 Starter, Windows 7 Home Basic, Windows 7 Home
Premium, Windows 7 x64 Home Basic, and Windows 7 x64 Home Premium is not
supported.
1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your
computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.
The Install Printer Driver and Software screen appears.
3 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
4 Select Remote Installation, and then click Next.
5 Enter the Administrator user name and password of the client computer,
then select the clients or servers, and then Next.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows
Security Alert is displayed:
• Windows Vista
• Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition
• Windows 7

To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or
Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
6 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in Select Printer, and then click
Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in Select Printer, try the
following steps:
• Click Refresh to update the information.
• Click Add Printer, and then enter a port name (any alphanumeric string)
and an existing IP address for the printer.
7 Select the required items on the Software and Documentation, and then
click Install.
8 Click Finish to exit this tool.
Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw

Multifunction Color Printer Only)
This section describes how to configure wireless settings through Easy Setup
Navigator.
The specifications of wireless setting function are described below:
Item Specification
Connectivity Wireless
Connectivity Standard IEEE 802.11b/802.11g compliant
Bandwidth 2.4 GHz
Data Transfer Rate 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
Security WEP (64/128bits), WPA-PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA-
2PSK (AES)
Certifications Wifi, WPA2.0 (Personal)
Wifi Protected Setup(WPS) Push Button Configuration (PBC), Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following:

Wizard Setup through USB connection
Advanced Setup through Ethernet connection
Operator Panel
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
WPS-PIN*1
WPS-PBC*2
*1
WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi® Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering
PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through
access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router
supports WPS.
*2
WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing
the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the
access point supports WPS.
NOTE: For information on how to install a wireless, see "Using Wizard Setup to
Configure Wireless Settings" on page 86 or "Using Advanced Setup to Configure
Wireless Settings" on page 88.
Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Settings


2 Click Guided Setup.
3 Click Connect Your Printer.
Select your type of connection screen appears.
4 Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next.
The setting method selection window appears.
5 Ensure that Wizard is selected, and then click Next.
6 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.

7 Confirm there are no errors displayed in the operator panel, and then click
NO.
If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.
8 Click Start installation.
10 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,
and then click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try
the following steps:
• Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.
11 Select the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then
click Next.
12 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install.
The Congratulations! screen appears.
The wireless configuration is complete.
Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Settings

To use the Advanced Setup, display the Configuration Wireless Setting
screen.
Displaying Configure Wireless Settings Screen


2 Click Guided Setup.
3 Click Connect Your Printer.
4 Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next.
The setting method selection window appears.
5 Select Advanced.
Select a connection method from the following

• Ethernet Cable
• WPS-PIN

• WPS-PBC
• Operator Panel
• Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Ethernet Cable
1 Select Ethernet Cable, and then click Next.
2 Follow the instructions, and then click Next.
The Advanced Configuration Tool screen appears.
3 Select the printer to be configured in the Select Printer screen, and then
click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be configured is not listed in the Select Printer screen,
try the following steps:
• Click Enter IP Address, and then enter the IP address of your printer.
4 Enter the SSID.
5 Select Type of wireless network.
6 Configure the security setting, and then click Next.
The IP Address Settings screen appears.
7 Select IP Mode depending on your network scheme.
When IPv4 is selected:
Configure the following:
a Select Type.
b Enter the following items:
• IP address of your printer
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway Address
When IPv6 is selected:
Configure the following:
a Select Use Manual Address.
b Enter IP address of your printer.

c Enter the gateway address of your network.
When Dual Stack is selected:
Configure the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings.
8 Click Next.
9 Ensure that the wireless settings are displayed, and then click Apply.
The Complete configuration screen appears.
10 Click Next.
11 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears, and then
click Next.
12 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click
NO on the Check Setup screen.
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.
13 Click Start Installation.


• Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer
manually.
16 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and
then click Next.
WPS-PIN
NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a
method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by
entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting, performed
through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless
router supports WPS.
1 Select WPS-PIN, and then click Next.

5 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer, and then
click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer, try the
following steps:
then click Next.
When the WPS-PIN operation is successful and the printer is rebooted,
wireless LAN connection is completed.
WPS-PBC
NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing
the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the
access point supports WPS.
1 Select WPS-PBC, and then click Next.

then click Next.
NOTE: For WPS-PBC operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the
manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.
When the WPS-PBC operation is successful and the printer is rebooted,
wireless LAN connection is completed.
Operator Panel
1 Select Operator Panel, and then click Next.


NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen,
try the following steps:
• Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer
manually.
then click Next.

1 Select Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and then click Next.

then click Next.

When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool operation is successful and
the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection is completed.
Setting up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer

(When you need to setup your wireless connectivity with your
computer)
For DHCP network:

1 Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:
NOTE: You can also change the wireless settings using the wireless
application that may be installed in your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless
network settings is checked.
NOTE: Make note of the wireless settings on the Advanced window
(step f) and the Wireless Network Properties window (step g). You may
require these settings later.
e Click the Advanced button.
f Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
Advanced dialog box.
g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked

i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top
of the list.
j Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a Open Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are
entering an unsecured area.
g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.
b Select Network and Sharing Center.
c Select Connect to a network.
d Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are

f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a
success.
e Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available
network list, and click Connect.
2 Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the printer.
a Press the (Menu) button on the printer operator panel.
b Press the button until System is highlighted, and then press the
button.
c Press the button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press
the button.
d Press the button until Network is highlighted, and then press the
button.
e Press the button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the
button.
f Press the button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the
button.
(Default IP address range: 169.254.xxx.yyy)
IP Address
169.254.000.041
3 Ensure that the IP Address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.

4 Enter the IP address in the address bar on your web browser.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool page appears.
5 Create wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web

Tool.
6 Reboot the printer.
7 Restore the wireless settings on your computer.

NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless
configuration software, use it to change the wireless settings. See the
instructions below.
b Select Network Connections.
c Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
d Select Wireless Network tab.
e Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless
f Click Advanced.
g You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure
mode.
For Adhoc mode:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
dialog box.
For Infrastructure mode:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the
dialog box.
h Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
i Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.
j Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
k Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
e Select the network, and then click Connect.

success.
d Select the network, and then click Connect.
success.
f Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.
For Fixed IP networks:

1 Set up your computer for wireless connectivity:
NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration
software, use it to change the wireless settings. See the instructions below.
c Select the Wireless Networks tab.

NOTE: Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step d
and step f so that you can restore them later.
e Click the Advanced button.
f Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
Advanced dialog box.
g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top
of the list.
For Windows Vista:
e Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.

success.
d Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
success.
e Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available
network list, and click Connect.
2 Check the IP address on your computer.

3 Set the IP address on the printer.
See "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.
4 Enter the IP address in the address bar on your web browser.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool page appears.

5 Change the wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
6 Reboot the printer.
7 Restore the wireless settings on your computer.
NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless
configuration software, use it to change the wireless settings. Or you can
change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating
system. See the instructions below.
c Select Wireless Network tab.
e Click Advanced.
f You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure
mode.
For Adhoc mode:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the
dialog box.
For Infrastructure mode:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the
dialog box.
g Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.
i Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
For Windows Vista:

success.
d Select the network, and then click Connect.
success.
f Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.
Setting Up for Shared Printing

You can share your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities
CD that shipped with your printer, or using Windows Point and Print or peer-
to-peer method. However, if you use either of the Microsoft® methods you
will not get features such as the status monitor and other printer utilities,
which will get installed with the Drivers and Utilities CD.

If you want to use the printer on a network, share the printer and install its
drivers on all the computers on the network.
NOTE: You need to purchase a Ethernet cable separately for shared printing.
For Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows
Server 2003 x64 Edition
1 Click Start  Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click this printer icon and select Properties.
3 From the Sharing tab, check the Share this printer check box, and then
type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network
clients using this printer.
5 Click OK.
If the files are not present in your computer, then you will be prompted to
insert the server operating system CD.
For Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Hardware and Sound  Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3 Click Change sharing options button.
4 The "Windows needs your permission to continue" appears.
5 Click Continue button.
6 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share
name text box.
7 Select Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network
8 Click OK.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3 Click Change Sharing Options button if exists.

name text box.
6 Click OK.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start  Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options button if exists, and
then click Yes.
name text box.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Apply, and then click OK.
To check that the printer is shared:
• Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes, or
Devices and Printers folder is shared. The share icon is shown under the
printer icon.
• Browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server
and look for the shared name you assigned to the printer.
Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients
using the Point and Print method or the peer-to-peer method.
Point and Print

Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect
to a remote printer. This feature automatically downloads and installs the
printer driver.

For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows
1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My
Network Places.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the
host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to
the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the
Printers and Faxes folder. The time taken to copy varies based on the
network traffic.
Close My Network Places.
4 Print a test page to verify installation.
a Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition)  Settings (for Windows XP / Windows XP 64-bit Edition)
 Printers and Faxes.
b Select the printer you have installed.
c Click File  Properties.
d On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

2 Locate and double-click the host name of the server computer.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Click Continue in User Account Control dialog box.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A
new printer object is added to the Printers folder. The duration of this
procedure may vary based on the network traffic.
a Click Start  Control Panel  Hardware and Sound.
b Select Printers.
c Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.

host name.
5 Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A
new printer object will be added to the Printers folder. The time taken for
these activities varies based on network traffic.
a Click Start  Control Panel.
b Select Printers.
c Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.


1 Click Start  Network (Start  Network for Windows Server 2008 R2).
host name.
5 Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A
new printer object will be added to the Printers folder. The time taken for
these activities varies based on network traffic.
a Click Start  Devices and Printers.
b Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.
c On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
Peer-to-Peer
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is installed on each
client computer. The client computers can modify the drivers and handle the
print jobs.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows
1 Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition)  Settings (for Windows XP / Windows XP 64-bit Edition)
Printers and Faxes.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Click Next.
4 Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and
then click Next. If the printer is not listed, type in the path of the printer
in the text box.

For example:\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it
to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
server installation process.
5 Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If
no system driver is available, specify the location where the driver is
available.
6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then
click Next.
If you want to verify installation, click Yes to print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Hardware and Sound  Printers.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next.
If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The
printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the
Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.

For example:\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If
available.
click Next.
6 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
7 Click Finish.

1 Click Start  Control Panel  Printers.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next.
If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The
printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the
Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer
name>

on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
available.
click Next.
7 Click Finish.

1 Click Start  Devices and Printers.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed,
select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't
listed. Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the
printer in the text box, and then click Next.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer
name>
to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the
no system driver is available, you need to specify the path to the available
drivers.
5 Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.
click Next.
8 Click Finish.


10
Installing Printer Drivers on
Computers Running Macintosh
Installing the Drivers and Software
1 Run the Drivers and Utilities CD on the Macintosh computer.
2 Double-click the Dell 1355cnw Installer icon, and then click Continue.
3 Click Continue on the Introduction screen.
4 Confirm the installation location, and then click Continue.
5 Click Install to perform the standard installation.
6 Type the administrator's name and password, and then click OK.
7 Click Install to proceed with the installation.
8 Click Close to complete installation.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s)
When Using a USB connection

2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax.
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default.
5 Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
6 Click Add.
When Using Bonjour

2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh 117

If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the
printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default.
5 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
6 Click Add.
When Using IP Printing

4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click IP.
5 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
6 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
7 Select the model of your printer for Print Using.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is
displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.
8 Click Add.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11
When Using a USB Connection

2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.
118 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4 Click Add.
5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer list.
7 Click Add.
When Using Bonjour

3 Start the Printer Setup Utility.
4 Click Add.
5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
7 Click Add.
When Using IP Printing

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh 119

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.
4 Click Add.
5 Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
7 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
8 Select the model of your printer for Print Using.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is
displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.
9 Click Add.
120 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

Using Your Printer
121

122

11
Overview
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.
One of the features of the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool is the E-
Mail Alert Setup, which sends an e-mail to you or the key operator when the
printer needs supplies or intervention.
To fill up the printer inventory report, enter the asset tag of all the required
printers using the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the network
to display the asset tag number.
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change
the printer settings and keep track of printing trends.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 123

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your
printer in your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings
page, or display the TCP/IP Settings page, which lists the IP address.
The Operator Panel

button.
the button.
button.
5 Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Network on the system
settings page.
The Tool Box

NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, TCP/IP Settings cannot be
displayed.
NOTE:
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction Color
Printer Tool Box.
Select Printer window appears. In this case, click the name of this printer
listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
124 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign an IP address for your printer,
see "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to get feedback on the printer status. When a
toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen
to order an additional toner cartridge.
Printer Jobs
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and
Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to change printer settings and view the settings
in the operator panel remotely.
Print Server Settings

Using the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface
and necessary conditions for communications.
Print Volume
Use the Print Volume option to check the number of pages printed for each
paper size.
Address Book
Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, phone number,
server address, and fax number entries in the Address Book, or to register new
entries.

Printer Information
Use the Printer Information menu to display the information of your printer.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to get information about the paper size and type
of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
E-Mail Alert
Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive an e-mail when the printer needs
supplies or intervention. Enter your name or the key operator name in the e-
mail list box to be notified. Set E-mail Alert also when using the Scan to E-
mail feature.
Set Password
Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer
settings you selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Online Help
Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support web site.
Order Supplies at:

www.dell.com/supplies
Contact Dell Support at:

support.dell.com
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web

Tool
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.
It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web
browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be unreadable if the
language differs from that of your web browser.
Setting Up From Web Browser

It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your
web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
For Internet Explorer® 6.0, Internet Explorer 7.0, Internet Explorer 8.0
Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Select Languages in the General tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
For example:
• Italian (Italy) [it-IT]
• Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]
• German (Germany) [de-DE]
• French (France) [fr-FR]
• English (United States) [en-us]
• Danish [da-DK]
• Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]
• Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]
• Swedish [sv-SE]
Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) settings in the
Connections tab.
3 You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:
• Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.
• Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of your printer in the
Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under
Exceptions.

After setting the language and proxy, enter
<http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the IP address of your printer) in the
URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
For Firefox 2.0 or Later
Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Advanced.
3 When you use Firefox 2.0, click Choose in the General tab. When you use
Firefox 3.0, click Choose in the Content tab.
4 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in
order of preference list.
For example:
• English [en] or English/United States [en-us]
• Italian [it]
• Spanish [es]
• German [de]
• French [fr]
• Dutch [nl]
• Norwegian [no]
• Swedish [sv]
• Danish [da]
Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Advanced tab.
3 Click Network on the Options dialog box.
4 Click Connection  Settings.
5 When you use Firefox 2.0, do one of the following:
• Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box.
• Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.

• Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter the IP
address of your printer in the No Proxy for edit box.
• Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.
When you use Firefox 3.0, do one of the following:
• Select the No Proxy check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.
• Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.
• Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter a
hostname and a port number if you have a list of one or more proxy
servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the
IP address of your printer in the No Proxy for edit box.
• Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.
After setting the language and proxy, enter
<http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the IP address of your printer) in the
URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
Setting Up From Operator Panel

You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to
Enable (the factory default) on the operator panel. Check the operator
panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For
more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359.
Page Display Format

The layout of the page is divided into three sections.
Top Frame
The top frame is located on the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of
the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.
The following items are displayed in the top frame.

1 Dell 1355cnw Displays the printer model name.
MFP
2 IP Address Displays the IP address of your printer.
3 Location Displays the location of the printer. The location can be
changed in the Basic Information on the Print Server
Settings page.
4 Contact Person Displays the administrator name of the printer. The name
can be changed in the Basic Information on the Print
Server Settings page.
5 Printer Bitmap Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status
menu appears in the right frame when you click the image.
Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all pages. The menu titles
displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You
can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.
The following menus are displayed in the left frame.

1 Printer Status Links to the Printer Status menu.
2 Printer Jobs Links to the Printer Jobs menu.
3 Printer Settings Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.
4 Print Server Links to the Print Server Reports menu.
Settings
5 Print Volume Links to the Print Volume menu
6 Address Book Links to the Address Book menu.
7 Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu.
8 Tray Settings Links to the Tray Settings menu.
9 E-Mail Alert Links to the Print Server Settings menu.
10 Set Password Links to the Other Features menu.
11 Online Help Links to the Dell Support website.
12 Order Supplies at: Links to the Dell web page.
13 Contact Dell Links to the Dell support page web address:
Support at: support.dell.com

Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all pages. The contents of the
right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. For
details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu
Items" on page 133.
Buttons in the Right Frame
1 Refresh button Receives the current printer configuration and updates

the latest information in the right frame.
2 Apply New Settings Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer
button Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new
settings replace the old settings of the printer.
3 Restore Settings Restores the old settings. New settings will not be
button submitted to the printer.

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. When you access these menus, the authentication
window appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password of the
administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank
(NULL). You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the
Other Features menu. For more information, see "Set Password" on page 178.
Details of the Menu Items
"Printer Status" "Printer Status"

"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"
"Printer Jobs" "Job List"
"Completed Jobs"

"Printer "Printer Settings "Menu Settings"
Settings" Report" "Reports"
"Printer "System Settings"
Settings" "Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Color Balance"
"Copy Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"
"Printer "Paper Density"
Maintenance" "Adjust BTR"
"Adjust Fuser"
"Auto Registration Adjustment"
"Color Registration Adjustment"
"Clean Developer"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Reset Defaults"
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"

"Print Server "Print Server "Print Server Setup Page"
Settings" Reports" "E-Mail Alert Setup Page"
"Print Server "Basic Information"
Settings" "Port Settings"
"Wireless LAN (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction
Color Printer only)"*1
"TCP/IP"
"E-Mail Alert"
"SNMP"
"Scan to PC"
"Other "Set Password"
Features" "Reset Print Server"
"Print Volume" "Print Volume"
"Address Book" "Fax/E-mail" "Address Book - Top Page"
"Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Address Book (Delete)"
"FAX Group - Top Page"
"FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"FAX Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Group - Top Page"
"E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"E-Mail Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Default Setup"
"Server Address" "Server Address - Top Page"
"Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Server Address (Delete)"
"Tray Settings"
*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware,
and specifications of the printer.

The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status
Purpose:
To check the status of the consumables and trays.
Values:
Cyan Cartridge Level Displays the percentage of toner remaining in

Magenta Cartridge Level each toner cartridge. When a cartridge is
empty, a message appears. The text Call or
Yellow Cartridge Level Order is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies
Black Cartridge Level website.
Paper Trays Status OK Indicates that there is some paper in the tray
but the quantity is unknown.
Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper
tray.
Size Displays the size of paper in the tray.
Output Tray Status OK Indicates that the tray is available.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the
output tray.
Cover Status Closed Indicates that the cover is closed.
Open Indicates that the cover is open.
Printer Type Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser
is displayed normally.
Printing Speed Displays the printing speed.
Printer Events
Purpose:
When faults such as Out of Paper or Rear Cover is Open occur, the details of
all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the Printer Events page.
Values:

Location Displays the location where the error occurred.
Details Displays the details of the error.
Printer Information
Purpose:
To display the system information of the printer. This page can also be
displayed by clicking Printer Information in the left frame.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number Displays Dell's service tag number.

Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of the printer.
Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer.
Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.
Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.
Printer Revision Firmware Displays the version of the controller.
Levels Version
Network Displays the NIC version.
Firmware
Version
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed
Jobs pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol
or the print jobs.
Job List
Purpose:
To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to
update the screen.
Values:
ID Displays the job ID.

Job Name Displays the file name of the job being printed.
Owner Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.
Job Status Displays the status of the job being printed.
Job Type Displays the type of the job.
Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Displays the date when the print job was submitted.
Time
Completed Jobs
Purpose:
To check the completed jobs. Up to 20 latest jobs are displayed. Click the
Refresh button to update the screen.
Values:
ID Displays the job ID.

Job Name Displays the file name of the job.
Owner Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.
Output Result Displays the status of the job.
Job Type Displays the type of the job.
Impression Displays the total number of pages used by the print job.
Number
No. of Sheets Displays the total number of sheets used by the print job.
Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Time
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to
configure the printer settings.
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.

Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of your printer.
Values:
System Settings Power Saver Displays the time taken by the printer before it
Timer - Sleep enters the power saver timer - sleep after it
finishes a job.
Power Saver Displays the time taken by the printer before it
Timer - Deep enters the power saver timer - deep sleep after it
Sleep goes into the power saver timer mode 1.
Auto Reset Displays the time taken by the printer before it
automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or
Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no
additional settings are made.
Control Panel Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
Tone when the operator panel input is correct. Off
indicates that the tone is disabled.
Panel Alert Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
Tone when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off
Job Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
when a job is complete. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.
Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.
Out of Paper Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted
Tone when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates
that the tone is disabled.
Auto Clear Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5
Alert Tone seconds before the printer performs auto clear. Off

All Tones Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off
indicates that all the tones are disabled.
Job Time-Out Displays the amount of time that the printer waits
for data to arrive from the computer.
Panel Language Displays the language used on the operator panel.
Auto Log Displays whether to automatically print a job
Print*1 history report after every 20 jobs.
mm/inch Displays the measurement unit used after the
numeric value on the operator panel.
Secure Settings Panel Lock Set Displays whether to limit access to Admin
Menu with a password.
Copy Service Displays whether to enable the Copy service or to
Lock Set require a password to use the service.
Scan Service Displays whether to enable the Scan service or to
Fax Service Displays whether to enable the Fax service or to
Print from USB Displays whether to enable the USB-Print service
or to require a password to use the service.
Secure Receive Displays whether to require a password to print
Set incoming faxes.
Copy Defaults Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in
black and white.
Reduce/Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement
ratio.
Original Type Displays the default document type.
Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default copy density level.
Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of
the original to enhance text on the copy.

Copy Color Color Balance Displays the color balance level of red.
Balance (Red)
Color Balance Displays the color balance level of green.
(Green)
Color Balance Displays the color balance level of blue.
(Blue)
Gray Balance Displays the gray balance level.
Copy Settings Multiple-Up Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up
feature.
Collated Displays whether to sort the copy job.
Margin Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
Top/Bottom
Margin Displays the value of the left and right margins.
Left/Right
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.

Scan Defaults Scan To Displays whether to store scanned image on a
Network network server or on a computer.
File Format Displays the file format to save the scanned image.
Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and
white.
Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.
Document Size Displays the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default scan density level.
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of
the original to enhance text on the scanned image.
Top/Bottom
Left/Right
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.
Image Displays the image compression level.
Compression
Max E-Mail Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be
Size sent.
Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax
transmission.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default density level to be used for
fax transmission.
Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.
Fax Settings Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.
Auto Receive Displays the interval at which the printer goes into
Fax the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming
call.
Tel/Fax the fax receive mode after the external telephone
receives an incoming call.
Answer/Fax the fax receive mode after the external answering
machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which
audibly monitors a transmission through the
internal speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Displays the volume of the ring tone, which
Volume indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call
through the internal speaker when Receive Mode
is set to Telephone/Fax.
Line Type Displays the line type.
Tone/Pulse Displays the dialing type.
Resend Delay Displays the interval between transmission
attempts.
Redial Displays the number of redial attempts.
Attempts
Redial Delay Displays the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from
unwanted numbers.
Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a
remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Displays the remote receive code to start Remote
Tone Receive.
Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of
sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Displays the name of sender to be printed on the
Name header of faxes.
Fax Number Displays the fax number to be printed on the
header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) setting.
Sent Fax Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a
Forward specified destination.
Fax Forward Displays the fax number of the destination to
Number which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials
Number before any auto dial number is started.
Discard Size Displays whether to discard text or images at the
bottom of a fax page when the entire page does
not fit onto the output paper.
ECM Displays whether to enable the Error Correction
Mode (ECM).
Modem Speed Displays the fax modem speed.
Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax
activity report after every 50 incoming and
outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission report
after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.
Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report
after every fax transmission to multiple
destinations or only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol Displays whether to print a protocol monitor
report after every fax transmission or only when an
error occurs.
Country Displays the country where the printer is used.
Paper Density Plain Displays the paper density of plain paper.
Label Displays the paper density of labels.

Adjust BTR Plain Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for plain paper.
Plain Thick Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for thick plain paper.
Covers Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for cover paper.
Label Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for labels.
Coated Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for coated paper.
Recycled Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for recycled paper.
Envelope Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller
for envelopes.
Adjust Fuser Plain Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
plain paper.
Plain Thick Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
thick plain paper.
Covers Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
cover paper.
Label Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
labels.
Coated Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
coated paper.
Recycled Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
recycled paper.
Envelope Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for
envelopes.
Auto Registration Adjustment Displays whether to automatically adjust color
registration.
Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the
printer is installed.
Non-Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another
manufacturer.

Clock Settings Date Format Displays the default date format.
Time Format Displays the default time format; 24H or 12 Hour
Clock.
Time Zone Displays the default time zone.
Set Date Displays the date setting.
Set Time Displays the time setting.
Web Link Select Reorder Displays a link used for ordering consumables,
Customization URL which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in
the left frame.
Regular Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be
linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Premier Displays the premier web address
(http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Tray Settings Tray 1 Paper Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.
Type
Tray 1 Paper Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.
Size
Tray 1 Custom Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in
Size - Y the MPF.
Tray 1 Custom Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in
Size - X the MPF.
Display Popup Displays whether to use a popup menu that
prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
*1 If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.
Reports
Purpose:
To print the settings and history information of your printer.
Values:
System Settings Click the Start button to print the system settings page.

Panel Settings Click the Start button to print the panel settings page.
Job History Click the Start button to print the Job History report.
Error History Click the Start button to print the Error History report.
Address Book Click the Start button to print the Address Book report.
Demo Page Click the Start button to print the Demo Page.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings tab contains the System Settings, Secure Settings, Copy
Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy Settings, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, and Fax
Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic printer settings.
Values:
Power Saver Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
Timer - Sleep*1 saver timer mode 1 after it finishes a job.
Power Saver Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
Timer - Deep saver timer mode 2 after it goes into the power saver timer mode 1.
Sleep
Auto Reset Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically
resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax on the operator panel to
the defaults when no additional settings are made.
Control Panel Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
Tone panel input is correct, or disables the tone.
Panel Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is incorrect, or disables the tone.
Job Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is complete,
or disables the tone.
Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs,
or disables the tone.
Out of Paper Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs
Tone out of paper, or disables the tone.

Auto Clear Alert Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the
Tone printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.
All Tones Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.
Job Time-Out Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to
arrive from the computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel.
Auto Log Print*2 Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
mm/inch*3 Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value
on the operator panel.
*1 Enter 5 in Power Saver Timer - Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode
five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warm-up
time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room
lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this
keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value
between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance
between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer
mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the
standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
*2 If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.
*3 The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the
password.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When you change
the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the
left frame and set the password.
Values:
Panel Lock Set Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.

New Password Sets a password that is required to access Admin Menu.
Re-enter Enter the new password again to confirm.
Password

Function Enabled
Purpose:
To enable the services to be password-enabled, and allow the user to change
it.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to limit the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print
services. When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, click Set Password you change on the left frame and set the password.
Values:
Copy Service Enables you to set a password for the Copy Service feature.
Lock Set
Scan Service Enables you to set a password for the Scan Service feature.
Lock Set
Fax Service Enables you to set a password for the Fax Service feature.
Lock Set
Print from USB Enables you to set a password for the USB-Print Service feature.
New Password Sets a password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print
services.
Password
Secure Receive
Purpose:
Enables you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes. When the Secure
Receive feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them
when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock printing incoming fax. When changing
the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the
left frame and set the password.
Values:
Secure Receive Enables you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes.
Set
New Password Sets a password that is required to print incoming faxes.

Password
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:
Color Selects mode for color or black and white copying.

Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Custom Sets a custom reduction/enlargement ratio within the range of 25%
Reduce/Enlarge to 400% when Reduce/Enlarge is set to Custom.
Original Type Sets the copy image quality.
Document Size Sets the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default copy density level.
Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance
text on the copy.
Copy Color Balance

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level.
Values:
Color Balance (Red) Sets the color balance level of red.

Color Balance (Green) Sets the color balance level of green.
Color Balance (Blue) Sets the color balance level of blue.
Gray Balance Sets the gray balance level.
Copy Settings
Purpose:
To configure the Copy settings.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Multiple-Up Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit
onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in
the original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in
the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
Collated Sets whether to sort the copy job.
Margin Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0
Top/Bottom mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0
Left/Right mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50
mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Values:
Scan To Computer Stores the scanned image on a computer using the

Network (Network)* Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Server (FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the
FTP protocol.
File Format Sets the file format to save the scanned image.
Color Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Resolution Sets the default scan resolution.
Document Size Sets the default document size.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default scan density level.

Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance
text on the scanned image.
Margin Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0
Top/Bottom mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0
Left/Right mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50
mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.
Image Sets the image compression level.
Compression
Max E-Mail Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range
Size of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default is 2048 K bytes.
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
Values:
Resolution Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized

characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small
characters or thin lines or documents printed
using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine
detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the super fine
resolution.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic
images.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default density level to be used for fax transmission.
Delayed Start Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a
specified time.

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic fax settings.
Values:
Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can
receive a fax by picking up the handset of the
external telephone, pressing the remote receive code,
and then pressing .
Fax* Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/ When the printer receives an incoming fax, the
Fax external telephone rings for the time specified in
Auto Receive Fax/Tel, and then the printer
automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not
a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker
indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Answer The printer can share a telephone line with an
Machine/ answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
Fax monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there
are fax tones. If the phone communication is using
serial transmission in your country (such as Germany,
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France
and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone
company. After the telephone company has provided
a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
specific ring pattern.
Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Receive Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
Tel/Fax mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.

Auto Receive Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
Answer/Fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming
call.
Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.
Ring Tone Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an
Volume incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker
when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Line Type Sets the line type.
Tone/Pulse Sets the dialing type.
Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the
destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not
redial.
Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone
Book.
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on
the external telephone.
Remote Receive Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote
Tone Receive.
Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of
faxes.
Fax Header Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up
Name to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of
faxes.
Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a
service provided by some telephone companies.
Sent Fax Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Forward Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming
Number faxes will be forwarded.

Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials
Number before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the
Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto
the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the
bottom of the page.
ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote
machines must also support the ECM.
Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or
reception error occurs.
Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every
50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error
occurs.
Fax Protocol Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax
Country Sets the country where the printer is used.
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust
Fuser, Auto Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustment, Clean
Developer, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, Clock Settings, and
Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:

Plain Sets the paper density of plain paper.
Label Sets the paper density of labels.
Adjust BTR
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller
(BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive
values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you
see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white
spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain
paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick
plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Covers Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover
Label Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels
within the range of -3 to 3.
Coated Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated
Recycled Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled
Envelope Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for
envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.
Adjust Fuser
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To
lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.

The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When
the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
Values:
Plain Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for plain paper within
the range of -3 to 3.
Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick plain paper
within the range of -3 to 3.
Covers Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for cover paper within
Label Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for labels within the
range of -3 to 3.
Coated Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for coated paper within
Recycled Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for recycled paper within
Envelope Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for envelopes within the
range of -3 to 3.
Auto Registration Adjustment

Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Color Registration Adjustment

Purpose:
To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the
printer or when the printer is moved to a different location.
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto
Registration Adjustment is set to Off.
Clean Developer
Purpose:

To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge, to use
up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to
stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Values:
Clean Click Start to stir the toner in the toner cartridge.

Developer
Yellow Toner Click Start to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
Refresh
Magenta Toner Click Start to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
Refresh
Cyan Toner Click Start to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
Refresh
Black Toner Click Start to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.
Refresh
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with
barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of
the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality,
incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Values:
0 meter* Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
1000 meters
2000 meters
3000 meters
Reset Defaults
Purpose:

To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) memory for system parameters,
Address Book data for fax, or Address Book data for e-mail. After executing
this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset
to their default values.
Values:
Reset Defaults Click Start to initialize the system parameters.

and Restart
Printer
Reset Defaults Click Start to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.
of User (Fax)
Section
Reset Defaults Click Start to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the
of User (Scan) Address Book.
Section
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features
unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer. Dell
recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not
provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or
components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart
the printer.
Clock Settings
Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:

Date Format*1 yy/mm/dd Specifies the date format.
mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
Time Format 12 Hour Specifies the time format.
Clock*
24H
Time Zone Specifies the time zone.
Set Date Specifies the current date.
Set Time Specifies the current time.
*1
The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Web Link Customization

Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Values:
Select Reorder Select the Regular or Premier web address to be linked to Order
URL Supplies at: in the left frame.
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order
Supplies at: in the left frame.
Premier Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that
can be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and
necessary conditions for communications.
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.

Print Server Reports
The Print Server Reports tab contains the Print Server Setup Page and E-Mail
Alert Setup Page.
Print Server Setup Page

Purpose:
To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports. On this page, you can only
verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages
in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
Ethernet*1 Ethernet Displays the current settings of Ethernet

Settings transmission rate and the duplex settings.
Current Displays the current Ethernet settings.
Ethernet
Settings
MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address
of the printer.
Wireless*2 SSID Displays the name that identifies the network.
Network Type Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or
Infrastructure mode.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer
setting.
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the connection.
Link Quality Displays the quality of the connection.
Encryption Displays the security method.
Transmit Key Displays the transmit key.

TCP/IP Host Name Displays the host name.
Settings IP Mode Displays the IP mode.
IPv4 IP Address Displays the IP address mode.
Mode
IP Address Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Gateway Displays the gateway address.
Address
IPv6 Use Manual Displays the manual IP address.
Address
Manual Displays the IP address.
Address
Stateless Displays the stateless addresses.
Address 1-3
Link Local Displays the link local address.
Address
Manual Displays the gateway address.
Gateway
Address
Auto Configure Displays the gateway address.
Gateway
Address
DNS IPv4 Get DNS Displays if the printer receives the
Server Address DNS server address automatically
from DHCP from the DHCP server.
Manual DNS Displays the DNS server address.
Server Address
IPv6 Get DNS Displays if the printer receives the
Server Address DNS server address automatically
from DHCPv6- from the DHCPv6-lite server.
lite
Manual DNS Displays the DNS server address.
Server Address

LPD Port Settings Displays the port status.
Connection Displays the connection time-out period.
Time-Out
Bonjour Port Settings Displays the port status.
(mDNS)
Port9100 Port Settings Displays the port status.
Port Number Displays the port number.
Time-Out
HTTP Port Settings Displays the port status.
Port Number Displays the port number.
Simultaneous Displays the number of connections received
Connections simultaneously by the client.
Time-Out
WSD Port Settings Displays the WSD (Web Services on Devices) port
status.
Port Number Displays the WSD port number.
Receive Displays the receive time-out period.
Time-Out
Notification Displays the notification time-out period.
Time-Out
Maximum Displays the maximum number of TTLs.
Number of
TTL
Maximum Displays the maximum number of notifications.
Number of
Notification
SNMP Port Settings Displays the port status.
LLTD Port Settings Displays the port status.
FTP Client Connection Displays the connection time-out period.
Time-Out
FTP Passive Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

SMB Client Connection Displays the connection time-out period.
Time-Out
*1
This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wired network.
*2 This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.
E-Mail Alert Setup Page

Purpose:
To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the e-mail feature and E-Mail Alerts
feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to
change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
E-Mail Server Port Status Displays the port status.

Settings Primary SMTP Displays the primary SMTP gateway.
Gateway
SMTP Port Displays the SMTP port number.
Number
E-Mail Send Displays the authentication method for outgoing
Authentication e-mail.
POP3 Server Displays the POP3 server address.
Address
POP3 Port Displays the POP3 port number.
Number
Reply Address Displays the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server Displays the status of the SMTP server
Connection connection.

E-Mail Alert E-Mail List 1 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the
Settings E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 1.
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert
List 1 receive status for consumables.
Paper Handling Displays the e-mail alert
Alerts receive status for paper
handling.
Service Call Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for service calls.
E-Mail List 2 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the
E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 2.
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert
List 2 receive status for consumables.
Paper Handling Displays the e-mail alert
Alerts receive status for paper
handling.
Service Call Displays the e-mail alert
receive status for service calls.

The Print Server Settings tab contains the Basic Information, Port Status, Wireless
LAN, TCP/IP, E-Mail Alert, SNMP, and Scan To PC pages.
Basic Information
Purpose:
To configure the basic information of the printer.
Values:

System Settings Printer Name Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Location Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63
alphanumeric characters.
Contact Person Specifies the contact name, number, and other
information of the administrator and service
center using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Administrator Specifies the contact address of the administrator
E-Mail Address and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.
Asset Tag Enter the asset tag number for the printer.
Number
EWS Settings Auto Refresh Automatically refreshes the contents of the status
display pages.
Auto Refresh Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents
Interval of the status display pages automatically from 15
to 600 seconds.
NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame,
Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed Jobs page.
Port Settings
Purpose:
To enable or disable printing connectors and management protocol features.
Values:

Ethernet*1 Ethernet Auto* Detects Ethernet transmission
Settings rate and the duplex settings
automatically.
10Base-T Half- Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex
Duplex as the default value.
10Base-T Full- Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex
Duplex as the default value.
100Base-TX Selects 100Base-TX Half-
Half-Duplex Duplex as the default value.
100Base-TX Full- Selects 100Base-TX Full-
Duplex Duplex as the default value.
Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of
Ethernet.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of
the printer.
Port Status LPD Specifies whether to enable LPD.
Port9100 Specifies whether to enable Port9100.
E-Mail Alert Specifies whether to enable the E-Mail Alert
feature.
SNMP Specifies whether to enable the SNMP.
WSD Specifies whether to enable the WSD port.
Bonjour Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour(mDNS)
(mDNS) feature.
Status Messager Specifies whether to enable the Status Messager.
LLTD Specifies whether to enable LLTD.
*1
This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is
rebooted. When you change or configure the settings, click the Apply New Settings
button to apply the new settings.
Wireless LAN (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)

Purpose:
To configure wireless network settings.

To connect the printer with a wireless network, be sure to disconnect the
cable.
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.
Values:
Wireless SSID Specifies the name that identifies the wireless

Settings network using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Network Type Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or
Infrastructure.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless network
setting of the printer.
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless
connection of the printer.
Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network
connection of the printer.

Security Encryption Select the security method from the list.
Settings No Security* Specifies No Security to
configure the wireless setting
without specifying a security
method from WEP, WPA-
PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES,
and WPA-PSK TKIP.
WEP 64 Bit Specifies the WEP 64 Bit
ASCII (5 Bytes) ASCII to use through the
wireless network.
WEP 128 Bit Specifies the WEP 128 Bit
ASCII (13 Bytes) ASCII to use through the
wireless network.
WEP 64 Bit Hex Specifies the WEP 64 Bit Hex
(10 Bytes) to use through the wireless
network.
WEP 128 Bit Hex Specifies the WEP 128 Bit
(26 Bytes) Hex to use through the
wireless network.
WPA-PSK AES*1 Specifies the WPA-PSK AES
to use through the wireless
network.
WPA2-PSK AES*1 Specifies the WPA2-PSK AES
network.
WPA-PSK TKIP Specifies the WPA-PSK TKIP
network.
WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from
Encryption.
Re-enter WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm.
Encryption.
Encryption.

Encryption.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key type from the list.
Pass Phrase Specifies the pass phrase.
Re-enter Pass Phrase Enter the pass phrase again to confirm.
*1
This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network
Type.
NOTE: This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless
network.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Values:

TCP/IP Host Name Specifies the host name.
Settings IP Mode Specifies the IP mode.
IPv4 IP Address Mode Selects the IP address mode.
Manual IP Manually sets the IP address.
Address
Manual Subnet Manually sets the subnet
Mask mask.
Manual Gateway Manually sets the gateway
Address address.
IPv6 Use Manual To set the IP address
Address manually.
Manual Address Manually sets the IP address.
To specify an IPv6 address,
enter the address followed by
a slash (/) and then "64". For
details, consult your system
administrator.
Stateless Address Displays the stateless
1-3 addresses.
Link Local Displays the link local address.
Address
Manual Gateway Manually sets the gateway
Address address.
Auto Configure Displays the gateway address.
Gateway Address

DNS DNS Domain Specifies the domain name of the domain name
Name server. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters,
periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to
specify more than one domain name, separate
them using a comma or semicolon.
IPv4 Get DNS Server Specifies whether to get the
Address from DNS server address
DHCP automatically from the
DHCP server.
Manual DNS Sets the DNS server address.
Server Address
IPv6 Get DNS Server Specifies whether to get the
Address from DNS server address
DHCPv6-lite automatically from the
DHCPv6-lite server.
Manual DNS Sets the DNS server address.
Server Address
LPD Connection Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to
Time-Out 1000 seconds.
Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.
Connection Sets the connection time-out period between 1
Time-Out and 1000 seconds.
HTTP Port Number Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between
8000 and 9999.
Simultaneous Displays the maximum number of connections
Connections received simultaneously by the client.
Connection Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255
Time-Out seconds.

WSD Port Number Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between
8000 and 9999.
Receive Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65535
Time-Out seconds.
Notification Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60
Delivery Time- seconds.
Out
Maximum Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Number of TTL
Maximum Sets the maximum number of notifications from
Number of 10 to 20.
Notification
E-Mail Alert
Purpose:
To configure settings for E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by
clicking E-Mail Alert in the left frame.
Values:

E-Mail Server Primary SMTP Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
Settings Gateway
SMTP Port Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be
Number 25, 587 or between 5000 and 65535.
E-Mail Send Specifies the authentication method for outgoing
Authentication e-mail.
SMTP Login Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63
User alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
SMTP Login Specifies the SMTP account password using up to
Password 31 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter SMTP Enter the SMTP account password again to
Login Password confirm.
POP3 Server Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address
Address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host
name using up to 63 characters.
POP3 Port Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must
Number be 110 or between 5000 and 65535.
POP User Specifies the POP3 account user name. Up to 63
Name alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
POP User Specifies the POP3 account password using up to
Password 31 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter POP Enter the password again to confirm.
User Password
Reply Address Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server Displays the status of the SMTP server
Connection connection.

E-Mail Alert E-Mail List 1 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Settings Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an
List 1 e-mail alert for consumables.
Paper Handling Specifies whether to receive an
Alerts e-mail alert for paper handling.
Service Call Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for service calls.
E-Mail List 2 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an
List 2 e-mail alert for consumables.
Paper Handling Specifies whether to receive an
Alerts e-mail alert for paper handling.
Service Call Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for service calls.
SNMP
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Values:

Community Community Specifies the community name to access (read
Name Name only) data using up to 31 alphanumeric
(Read only) characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is
entered. Characters entered for community name
in the previous settings will not be displayed on
the screen. The default Read Community is
public.
Re-enter Enter the community name to access (read only)
Community data again to confirm.
Name (Read only)
Community Specifies the community name to access (read
Name and write) data using up to 31 alphanumeric
(Read/Write) characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is
entered. Characters entered for community name
in the previous settings will not be displayed on
the screen. The default Read/Write Community
is private.
Re-enter Enter the community name to access (read and
Community write) data again to confirm.
Name
(Read/Write)
Community Specifies the community name used for trap up
Name (Trap) to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original settings will remain valid if nothing
is entered. Characters entered for community
name in the previous settings will not be
displayed on the screen. The default Trap
Community is " " (NULL).
Re-enter Enter the community name used for trap again to
Community confirm.
Name (Trap)

Trap Trap Address Type Select the trap address type from the list.
Notification Selecting Off clears the settings in Trap Address,
1-4 Port Number, and Notify, and does not notify
trap occurrence. Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 allows
you to enter Trap Address.
Trap Address Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
following format:
• IPv4
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each
section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0
and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are
not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and
65535.
• IPv6
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmm
mm format. Each section of "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff.
IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0
and 65535.
Trap Notification Enter the SNMP trap destination port number.
(IP) Port Number
Notify Specifies whether to notify trap occurrence.
Authenticate Error Trap Specifies whether to notify Authenticate Error
Trap.
Scan to PC
Purpose:
To specify the client when scanning data.
Values:
FTP Client Connection Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60

Time-Out seconds.
FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

SMB Client Connection Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60
Time-Out seconds.
Other Features
The Other Features tab contains the Set Password and Reset Print Server pages.
Set Password
Purpose:
To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters
of the printer from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.
Values:
Administrator Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The

Password password will appear as asterisks (*) in the field when it is entered.
Re-enter Enter the password again to confirm.
Administrator
Password
NOTE: If you forgot your password, initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) to restore
the password to the default (NULL). See "Reset Print Server" on page 178.
NOTE: When you change the password to lock the operator panel, set the
password from Panel Lock Set in the Printer Settings.
Reset Print Server

Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for the network feature and reboot
the printer. You can also initialize the NVM of the printer from Reset
Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Values:
Initialize NIC Click the Start button to initialize NVM. Network settings will
NVRAM revert to the factory default settings and reboot the network
Memory and capability.
restart printer.

Restart Printer Click the Start button to reboot the printer.
Print Volume
Use the Print Volume menu to verify the number of printed pages.
Values:
Printer Page Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was
Count shipped from the factory.
Paper Used Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.
Address Book
The Address Book menu contains the Fax/E-mail and Server Address pages.
Fax/E-mail
The Fax/E-mail page contains the following subpages.
Address Book Allows you to view, edit, or create address book entries.
Fax Group Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.
E-Mail Group Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.
E-Mail Default Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and
Setup message.
Address Book - Top Page

Purpose:
To view the address book entries registered on the Address book page.
Values:
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user
IDs indicated on the button.
ID:Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that
user ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name
column.

Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.
E-Mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.
Confirm/Chan Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected
ge user ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected user ID.
Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the address book entries on the Address Book page, or create a
new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Address Book top page.
Values:
ID (Fax Speed Displays the selected user ID.

Dial)
Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the
user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the phone number of the user, or enter a
phone number for the new entry.
E-mail Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an
e-mail address for the new entry.
Delete Click this button to delete the entry for the user ID. This button is
available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry.
Apply New Click this button to apply the new settings.
Settings
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
Address Book (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the address book entries registered on the Address Book page. The
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete
button on the Address Book top page.
Values:
ID (Fax Speed Displays the selected user ID.

Dial)
Name Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected
user ID.
Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.
E-mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Settings
FAX Group - Top Page

Purpose:
To view the fax group entries registered on the Fax Group page.
Values:
GroupID:Name Displays a fax group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without
an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm / Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
Change group ID.
selected group ID.
FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the fax number group entries on the Fax Group page, or create
a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Fax Group top page.
Values:

Fax Group ID Displays the selected group ID.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for
the group ID, or enter a new group name.
FAX Speed Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for
Dial the group of speed dial codes indicated on the
button.
ID:Name Displays a speed dial code and the names of an
entry registered under the speed dial code. Speed
dial codes without an entry show (Not in Use) in
the Name column.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an
entry registered under the selected speed dial
code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Settings
FAX Group (Delete)

Purpose:
To delete the fax number group entries registered on the Fax Group page. The
button on the Fax Group top page.
Values:
ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.
Settings
E-Mail Group - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.
Values:
GroupID:Name Displays a group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an
entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm/ Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
Change group ID.
selected group ID.
E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or
create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears
when you click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the E-Mail Group top
page.
Values:
E-Mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for
the group ID, or enter a new group name.
E-Mail Address Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for
the group of IDs indicated on the button.
ID:Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user
registered under that user ID. IDs without an
entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an
entry registered under the selected user ID, or
enter an e-mail address for the new entry.
Settings

E-Mail Group (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The
button on the E-mail Group top page.
Values:
ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.
Settings
E-Mail Default Setup

Purpose:
To set the default e-mail subject and message.
Values:
Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject. Up to 50

alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Body Text Allows you to enter the default e-mail message. Up to 200
Settings
Server Address
Server Address - Top Page

Purpose:
To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.
Values:

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.
ID:Name Displays a server ID and the name of a file directory registered
under that server ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in
the Name column.
Server Address Displays the address of the file directory.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.
Confirm/ Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
Change server ID.
selected server ID.
Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create
a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Server Address top page.
Values:
ID Displays the selected server ID.

Name Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server
ID, or enter a new server name.
Server Type FTP Select this to store scanned documents on a server
via the FTP protocol.
SMB Select this to store scanned documents on a
computer via the Server Message Block (SMB)
protocol.
Server Address Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the
server ID, or enter a new server address.
Share Name Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new
shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB.
Server Path Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new
path.

Server Port Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter
Number a new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port
number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.
Login Name Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access
the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.
Login Password Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the
selected protocol, or enter a new password.
Re-enter Enter the password again to confirm.
Password
Settings
Server Address (Delete)

Purpose:
To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The
button on the Server Address top page.
Values:
ID Displays the selected server ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the server ID.
Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID.
Settings
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in
the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Values:

Tray Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
Tray Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
Tray 1 Custom Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Size - Y
Tray 1 Custom Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Size - X
Display Popup Sets whether to display a popup menu that prompts the user to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
Settings


12
Print Media Guidelines
Print media can be paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others.
Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media.
Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing
troubles. This section describes selecting print media, caring for print media,
and loading the print media in Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) or Priority Sheet
Inserter (PSI).
Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long
paper. For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb)
xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print
media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper
package, and load the paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 59 and "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 66 for detailed loading instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is
recommended that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper
stock.
Weight
Both MPF and PSI automatically feed paper whose weights range from 60 to
163 g/m2 (16 to 44 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) may
not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75
g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can
cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes
through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
Print Media Guidelines 189

unwrapped, even in the feeder, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and cause feeding problems regardless of humidity. When printing
on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF or PSI.
Smoothness
The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is
too rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor
print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.
Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print
quality.
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability
of the printer to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original
packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper
to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is
either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the
width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long
fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb bond), grain
short is preferred.
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped
wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess characteristics that can
result in degraded paper handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use dry 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
xerographic paper. Business paper designed for general business use also
provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high
temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions.
The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the
manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is
acceptable for laser printers.
190 Print Media Guidelines

NOTE: Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of
print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber
content, and color.
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also
known as carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon
required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fuser
• Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on
the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such as optical character recognition
(OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to
successfully print on these forms.
• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper
• Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do
not meet DIN 19 309
• Multiple-part forms or documents
• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the
text) when printing on talc or acid paper.
• Moist paper that may cause wrinkle
Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
• Always use new, dry, and undamaged paper.
• Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the
paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This
may result in a paper jam.
• Do not remove the PSI while a job is printing.
• Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the MPF or PSI.
• Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the
stack on a level surface.
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead

When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer:
• Use grain long paper for best results.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or
engraved printing process.
• Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic
copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the
fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these
requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper
supplier.
Printing on Letterhead
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed
letterhead you have selected is acceptable for laser printers.

Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following
table for help when loading letterhead in the print media sources.
Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that
the title on the letter head enters the printer first.
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper

Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes
and in manufacturing techniques. However, it may not be possible to print on
the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.
To select and use pre-punched paper:
• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large
quantities of pre-punched paper.
• Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into
paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when
multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.
• Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your
printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be
as good as standard paper.
• Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched
paper.

Envelopes
Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels
of light wrinkling. Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is
recommended that you try a sample first. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 59 or "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 66 for instructions on loading an
envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
• Set the print media source to MPF or PSI. Set the paper type to Envelope,
and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
paper. You can use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond) weight for the envelope
feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with 100%
cotton content must not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.
• Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.
• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without
sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If
you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with
the envelope supplier.
• Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
• To load envelope in MPF or PSI, the print side must be facing up.
• See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on
page 59 or "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on
page 66 for instructions on loading an envelope.
• Use one envelope size during a print job.
• Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%)
and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes.
• For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing

– Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have nicked edges or bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.
When selecting labels:
• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to
withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per
square inch (psi).
• Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
NOTICE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that
you try a sample first.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without
sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.
• Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the
perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
• Do not print a label through the printer more than once.
• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
• Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during
printing, resulting in a jam.

• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is
recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm
(0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your
printer and could void your warranty.
CAUTION: Otherwise the printer occur in a jam and contaminate your printer and
your cartridges with adhesive. As a result, could void your printer and cartridge
warranties.
Storing Print Media

For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media
feeding problems and uneven print quality.
• For best results, store print media in an environment where the
temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is
40%.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the
floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton,
ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or
curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Identifying Print Media and Specifications

This section provides information on supported paper sizes, types, and
specification.
Supported Paper Sizes
Multipurpose Feeder Priority Sheet Inserter

(MPF) (PSI)
A4 (210x297 mm) Y Y
B5 (182x257 mm) Y Y
A5 (148x210 mm) Y Y
C5 (162x229 mm) Y Y

Multipurpose Feeder Priority Sheet Inserter
(MPF) (PSI)
Monarch (3.875x7.5 in) Y Y
*1 Y*4
Monarch LEF (7.5x3.875 in) Y
Envelope #10 (4.125x9.5 in) Y Y
DL (110x220 mm) Y Y
DL LEF (220x110 mm)*1 Y Y*4
Letter (8.5x11 in) Y Y
Legal (8.5x14 in) Y Y
Folio (8.5x13 in) Y Y
Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in) Y Y
Custom*2*3 Y Y
*1 You can place the originals in a long-edge feed direction or in a short-edge feed
direction. The following illustration shows SEF and LEF. The arrow mark in the
illustration shows the orientation of the paper loading.
NOTE: Not available when the XPS Printer Driver is used.
*2
Custom width: 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)
The maximum width for envelope (DL LEF): 220.0 mm (8.66 inches)
Custom length: 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
(For the PSI, 191.0 mm (7.50 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches))
The maximum length for envelope (Monarch LEF): 98.4 mm (3.87 inches)
*3 Only the administrator user can set the custom size from the printer driver.
*4
Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that is
loaded on the MPF will be fed.
SEF LEF

Supported Paper Types
Media Multipurpose Feeder Priority Sheet Inserter

(MPF) (PSI)
Plain Y* Y*
Plain Side 2 Y Y
Plain Thick Y Y
Plain Thick Side 2 Y Y
Recycled Y Y
Recycled Side 2 Y Y
Label Y Y
Covers Y Y
Covers Side 2 Y Y
Envelope Y Y
Coated Y Y
Coated Side 2 Y Y
* Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Paper Type Specifications
Paper type Weight (gsm) Remarks

Plain Paper 60-90 -
Plain Thick Paper 91-105 -
Covers 106-163 -
Coated 106-163 Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.
Label - Inkjet printer paper
cannot be used.
Envelopes - -
Recycled 60-105 -


13
Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free
printing.
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print
media. This information is usually on the print media package.
NOTE: After loading paper in the feeder, specify the same paper type on the
operator panel.
Capacity
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) can hold:
• 150 sheets of standard paper
• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of thick paper
• One sheet of coated paper
• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of post cards
• Five envelopes
• 16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of labels
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) can hold:
• 10 sheets of standard paper or one sheet of other paper
Print Media Dimensions

Both MPF and PSI accept print media within the following dimensions:
• Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)
• Length — 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
Loading Print Media 201

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
2 Pull the priority sheet inserter (PSI) out.
3 Pull the length guide forward until it stops.
202 Loading Print Media

4 Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.

7 Load print media on the MPF with the top edge first and with the

9 Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.

NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension
backward until it stops, and then pinch the length guide and slide it backward
until it touches print media.
10 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on
the paper tray.

11 Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than
plain print media is loaded. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the
MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the operator panel.
NOTE: For standard-size papers, adjust the guides first and then set papers.
Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the
printer driver. If not specified, the print image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or Monarch

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing
down, and the flap turned to the right.

To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to
be loaded with the print-side facing up, flap opened, and facing you.
When Loading C5
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.

NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to
paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed
from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below
when loading them in the MPF.
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.

NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes,
see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator on the printer driver.
Loading Letterhead
Load the letter head in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter
(PSI)
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the PSI while printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
2 Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper
tray.


5 Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the

PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.
Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

NOTE: Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that
is loaded on the MPF will be fed.
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the
printer driver. If not specified, the print image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or Monarch

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing
down, and the flap turned to the right.

To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to
be loaded with the print-side facing up, flap opened, and facing you.
When Loading C5
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.

NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to
paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the PSI right after they have been removed
from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below
when loading them in the PSI.
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.

NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes,
see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator on the printer driver.
Loading Letterhead
Load the letter head in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that

Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer Driver
Only)
NOTE: When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into
the feeder.
NOTE: The XPS printer driver does not support manual duplex printing.
When you start manual duplex printing, the instruction window appears.
Note that the window cannot be reopened once it is closed. Do not close the
window until duplex printing is complete.
Manual duplex printing can be done using the multipurpose feeder or the
priority sheet inserter.
The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

1 First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, rear sides are printed in the order of page 6, page
4, then page 2.
(Data LED) blinks and the message appears on the LCD when the
even pages finish printing.
2 After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output
tray and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up).
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them
before setting them.

3 Stack the prints and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up)
into the MPF. Ensure that Insert Output into paper tray is
highlighted, and then press the button. Print pages in the order page 1
(rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5 (rear of page 6).
NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document
consists of various sizes of papers.
The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

1 First print the even pages.
For a six page document, even pages are printed in the order page 2, page
4, then page 6.
(Data LED) blinks and the message appears on the LCD when the
even pages finish printing.

2 After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output
tray and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up).
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them
before setting them.
3 Next stack the prints and set them as they are (with the blank side face up)
into the PSI. Ensure that Insert Output into paper tray is
highlighted, and then press the button. Print pages in the order page 1
(rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5 (rear of page 6).

NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document
consists of various sizes of papers.
Using the Output Tray Extension

The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling
from the printer after the print job is complete.
Before printing a document, ensure that the output tray extension is fully
extended.
NOTE: When you pull out envelopes or small size print media, lift up the scanner
unit.


14
Operator Panel
Using the Operator Panel Buttons
The operator panel has a 4-line by 28-character liquid crystal display (LCD),
light-emitting diodes (LED), control buttons, and numeric keypad, which
allow you to control the printer.
1 One Touch Dial button

• Calls up the stored Fax number registered in the Phone Book. The
first four fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the buttons
in row order, starting from the top corner.
2 (Copy) button
• Moves to the top level of the Copy menu.
3 (Fax) button
• Moves to the top level of the Fax menu.
4 Data LED
• Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending Fax jobs.
5 Ready / Error LED
• Lights up when the printer is ready. (Ready LED)
• Lights up when the printer has an error. (Error LED)
Operator Panel 223

6 button
• Moves a cursor or highlight right or left.
7 button
• Moves a cursor or highlight up or down.
8 (Set) button
• Confirms the entry of values.
9 (Contacts) button
• Moves to the Address Book menu for the Fax and Scan services.
10 (Re-dial / Pause) button
• Re-dials a telephone number.
• Pauses a telephone number.
11 (Cancel) button
• Cancels the current processing or pending job.
12 B&W / Color LED
• Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected.
13 (Color Mode) button
• Switches the color mode.
14 (Start) button
• Starts a job.
15 (Backspace) button
• Deletes characters and numbers.
16 (Speed Dial) button
• Calls up a stored telephone number.
17 Numeric keypad
• Enters characters and numbers.
18 AC (All Clear) button
• Resets the current setting, and returns to the top menu.
19 (Back) button
• Returns to the previous screen.
224 Operator Panel

20 LCD Panel
• Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
21 (Scan) button
• Moves to the top level of the Scan menu.
22 (Menu) button
• Moves to the top level of the Print From USB Memory, Job Status, and
System menus.
NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the
current entry or setting. Make sure to press the button to save the current
entry or setting.
NOTE: For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric
characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters" on page 285.
Printing a Panel Settings Page

The panel settings page shows current settings for the operator panel menus.
The Operator Panel

button.
the button.
4 Press the button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then
press the button.
The panel settings page is printed.
The Tool Box

NOTE:
Operator Panel 225

The Tool Box opens.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reports page is displayed.
4 Click the Panel Settings button.
The panel settings page is printed.
226 Operator Panel

Printing, Copying,
Scanning, and Faxing
227

228

15
Printing
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information
from your printer, and how to cancel a job.
Tips for Successful Printing

Tips on Storing Print Media
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print
Media" on page 196.
Avoiding Paper Jams

NOTE: It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are
considering using with the printer before purchasing large quantities.
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid
paper jams. See the following instructions on loading print media:
• "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202
• "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211
• "Avoiding Jams" on page 459
If you experience a jam, see "Jam" on page 492 for instructions.
Sending a Job to Print

Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer. When you
choose Print from a software program, a window representing the printer
driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are
sending to print. Print settings selected from the driver have precedence over
the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or Tool Box.
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all the
available system settings you can change. If you are not familiar with a feature
in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.
To print a job from a typical Windows® application:
Printing 229

1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the File menu, select Print.
3 Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the
system settings as needed (such as the pages you want to print or the
number of copies).
4 To adjust system settings not available from the first screen, such as
Quality, Paper Size, or Image Orientation, click Preferences.
The Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
5 Specify the print settings. For more information, click Help.
6 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
7 Click Print to send the job to the selected printer.
Canceling a Print Job

There are several methods for canceling a print job.
Canceling From the Operator Panel

To cancel a job after it has started printing:
1 Press the (Cancel) button.
NOTE: Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will
continue to print.
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar

When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner
of the taskbar.
1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select the job you want to cancel.
3 Press Delete on the keyboard.
230 Printing

Canceling a Job From the Desktop
1 Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.
Click StartPrinters and Faxes (for Windows XP and 2003).
Click Start Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server®
2008 R2).
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers (for
Windows Vista®).
Click Start Control Panel Printers (for Windows Server 2008).
A list of available printers appears.
2 Double-click the printer you selected when you sent the job.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
3 Select the job you want to cancel.
4 Press Delete on the keyboard.
Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device

The Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB
storage device by operating from the operator panel.
Supported File Formats

Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB storage
device.
• PDF
• TIFF
• JPEG
To print a file in a USB storage device:
1 Insert a USB storage device to the USB port of the printer.
USB Memory appears.
2 Ensure that Print From is highlighted, and then press the button.
Select Document appears.
Printing 231

3 Press the button until the desired file is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Select printing options as required.
NOTE: You can print files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory
feature. Files saved without using the feature such as files created by user
may not be printed properly.
Printing a Report Page

By using the Report/List menu, you can print a various of settings for
your printer including printer settings, panel settings, job history, error
history, color test page, protocol monitor, address book, and fax activity. This
section describes two examples of printing from the Report/List menu.
Printing a System Settings Page

To verify detailed printer settings, print a printer settings page.
See "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 or "Understanding the
Tool Box Menus" on page 323 to identify the display and operator panel
buttons if you need help.
The Operator Panel

button.
the button.
button.
5 Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network on the
system settings page.
232 Printing

Printer Settings
Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the Tool Box.
NOTE:
NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.
These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are
restored.
To select a new value as a setting:
The Tool Box opens.
3 Select the desired menu item.
Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:
• A phrase or word to describe a setting
• A numerical value that can be changed
• An On or Off setting
4 Select the desired value, and then click the associated button with each
menu item.
Driver settings may have precedence over changes previously made and
may require you to change the Tool Box defaults.
Adjusting the Language

To display a different language on the operator panel:
From the Printer Operator Panel

Printing 233

button.
3 Press the button until Panel Language is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Press the button until the desired language is highlighted, and then
press the button.
From Your Computer

NOTE:
1 Click Start  All Programs  Dell Printers Dell 1355 Multifunction
The Tool Box opens.
3 Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The System Settings page is displayed.
4 Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then press the
Apply New Settings button.
234 Printing

16
Copying
Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are
printing, faxing, or copying. For more details, see "Loading Print Media" on
page 201.
Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
to load an original document for copying, scanning and sending a fax. You can
load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job using the ADF
or one sheet at a time using the document glass.
CAUTION: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 in. by 5.5 in. (139.7
mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5 in. by 14 in. (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different
sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents
having other unusual characteristics in ADF.
CAUTION: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or
thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot
be used in ADF.
CAUTION: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to
adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use
the document glass instead of the ADF.
Making Copies From the Document Glass

NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the
ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.
NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy
printout. For best results, clean the document glass before use. For more
information, see "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.
Copying 235

To make a copy from the document glass:
1 Open the document cover.
2 Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.
3 Close the document cover.

NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy
quality and increase the toner consumption.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the document
cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open.
236 Copying

4 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the
contrast, and the image quality. For more information, see "Setting Copy
Options" on page 238.
To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button.
5 Press the (Start) button to begin copying.
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while
scanning a document.
Making Copies From the ADF

NOTICE: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35
sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied
before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the
document glass instead of the ADF.
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
1 Load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents face up on the ADF
with top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document guides
to the correct document size.
NOTE: Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal-size
document.
2 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size,
contrast, and image quality. For more information, see "Setting Copy
Options" on page 238.
Copying 237

To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button.
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while
scanning a document.
Setting Copy Options

Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing the
(Start) button to make copies.
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying.
Number of Copies
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the
document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document
on the ADF" on page 296.
2 Press the (Copy) button.
3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad to select the desired
value.
Color
To select mode for color or black and white copying.
OR
document cover.
238 Copying

3 Press the (Color Mode) button to select the desired color mode.
Collated
To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page
documents, one complete three page document will print followed by the
second complete document.
NOTE: Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available
memory.
If a memory shortage occurs, cancel the collating by turning Collated to
Uncollated on the operator panel.
OR
document cover.
3 Ensure that Collated is highlighted, and then press the button.
4 Press the button to select the desired setting, and then press the
button.
Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job

Collated Sorts the copy job
Copying 239

Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job
5 If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies,

contrast, and image quality. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 238.
Reduce/Enlarge
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400
percent when you copy original documents from the document glass or ADF.
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or
Manual.
OR
document cover.
3 Press the button until Reduce/Enlarge is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Press the button to select the desired settings, and then press the
button.
mm series
200%
A5A4 (141%)
A5B5 (122%)
100%*
240 Copying

B5A5 (81%)
A4A5 (70%)
50%
inch series
200%
StmtLgl (154%)
StmtLtr (129%)
100%*
LglLtr (78%)
LdgrLtr (64%)
50%

Manual.
NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from
25% to 400%, or press the button to enlarge the zoom ratio or press the
button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.
Document Size
To specify the default document size:
OR
document cover.
3 Press the button until Document Size is highlighted, and then
press the button.
Copying 241

button.
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1

A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1 The default for Document Size
varies depending on country
specific factory default.
Original Type
To select the copy image quality.
OR
document cover.
3 Press the button until Original Type is highlighted, and then
press the button.
button.
242 Copying

Text Suitable for documents with text.
Text & Photo* Used for documents with both text and photos.
Photo Suitable for documents with photos.
Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
OR
document cover.
3 Press the button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Press the or button to select the desired settings, and then press the
button.
Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark
Lighter1 print.
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light
Darker2 print or faint pencil markings.
Copying 243

Sharpness
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
OR
document cover.
3 Press the button until Sharpness is highlighted, and then press the
button.
button.
Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.
Softest
Auto Exposure
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
OR
document cover.
244 Copying

3 Press the button until Auto Exposure is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Press the button until On is highlighted, and then press the
button.
Multiple-Up
To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Copying 245

Auto: ID Copy: Manual:
Automatically Always prints two Reduces the pages in
reduces the sides of the ID card the custom size
pages to fit in one in one page in the depending on the setting
page. original size (by of the Reduce/Enlarge
100%). menu.
OR
document cover.
246 Copying

3 Press the button until Multiple-Up is highlighted, and then press
the button.
button.
Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one
sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the
original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in
the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
5 If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies,

contrast, and image quality. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 238.
When you are using the document glass and Multiple-Up is set to
Auto, ID Copy, or Manual, the display prompts you for another page.
Press the button to select Yes or No, and then press the button.
7 If you select Yes, press the button to select Continue or Cancel,
and then press the button.
Margin Top/Bottom
To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy.
OR
document cover.
Copying 247

3 Press the button until Margin Top/Bottom is highlighted, and
4 Press the or button or enter the desired value using the numeric
keypad, and then press the button.
4 mm*/0.2 Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

inch*
0-50 mm/0.0-
2.0 inch
Margin Left/Right
To specify the left and right margins of the copy.
OR
document cover.
3 Press the button until Margin Left/Right is highlighted, and
248 Copying

4 mm*/0.2 Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
inch*
0-50 mm/0.0-
2.0 inch
Margin Middle
To specify the middle margin of the copy.
OR
document cover.
3 Press the button until Margin Middle is highlighted, and then
press the button.
0 mm*/ Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

0.0 inch*
0-50 mm/
0.0-2.0 inch
Copying 249

Changing the Default Settings
The COPY menu options, including contrast, and image quality can be set to
the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the default
settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding buttons
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing the AC (All Clear) button cancels the
changed settings and returns to the default status.
To create your own default settings:
button.
3 Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Ensure that Copy Defaults is highlighted, and then press the
button.
5 Press the button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then
press the button.
6 Press the or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter
the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the button.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the (Back) button.
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option

You can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer waits before it
restores the default copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing
them on the operator panel.
button.
the button.
250 Copying

4 Press the button until System Settings is highlighted, and then
press the button.
5 Ensure that Power Saver Timer is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the button to select Mode 1 or Mode 2, and then press the
button.
You can select from 5–30 minutes for Mode 1 or 1–6 minutes for Mode
2.
Copying 251

252 Copying

17
Scanning
Scanning Overview
You can use your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer to turn
pictures and text into editable images on your computer.
PaperPort® is a program that enables you to organize, find and share all your
paper and digital documents, and is supplied with your printer.
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item
type and how you plan to use the image or document after you scan it in to
your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.
Type Resolution
Documents 300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi
grayscale or color
Documents of poor quality or that 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi
contain small text grayscale
Photographs and pictures 100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer 150–300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer 300–600 dpi
Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities

of the application. If you require a resolution above those recommended in
the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or
pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.
NOTE: You can use PaperPort's built-in Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
software to copy text from scanned documents so that you can use and edit the text
in any text editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR process
requires textual images scanned at 150–600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is
recommended for graphics.
Scanning 253

If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe® Photoshop®, you
must assign the application to the printer by selecting it from the list of
available applications through the Select Software button each time you start
scanning. If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button,
PaperPort is automatically selected when you start scanning.
ScanDirect is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send
them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without first
running PaperPort. ScanDirect runs as a separate application from the
Windows start menu and displays the ScanDirect bar. For more information
about using ScanDirect, refer to the PaperPort's Help menu.
Icons on the ScanDirect bar represent the programs that are limited to
PaperPort and to ScanDirect. To scan and send an item to a program, click the
program icon and then scan the item. ScanDirect automatically starts the
selected program when the scan is complete.
Scanning From the Operator Panel

NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2 Press the (Scan) button.
3 Press the button until Scan to Application is highlighted, and
4 Configure the scanning settings as necessary.
5 Press the (Start) button.
The selected application window opens on your computer.
254 Scanning

NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select
1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scan Button Manager, and then click OK.
NOTE: Once you check the Always use this program for this action check box
when selecting 1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scan Button Manager, the selected
application is automatically used without displaying the program selection window.
NOTE: You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the
settings for scanning. For details, see "Quick Launch Utility" on page 410.
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver

Your printer supports the Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN)
driver for scanning images. TWAIN is one of the standard components
provided by Microsoft® Windows XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows
Server 2008, Windows Vista®, and Windows 7, and works with various
scanners.
Scanning 255

To scan an image from the PaperPort:
OR
2 On the Windows Start menu, click Nuance PaperPort 12 from All
Programs, and then click PaperPort.
3 Click Select, then select TWAIN: Dell 1355cn/cnw MFP Scanner, and
then click OK.
4 Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview
image.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.
5 Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options
tabs.
6 Click Scan to start scanning.
7 Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to
your computer.
256 Scanning

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition
(WIA) Driver
Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of
the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and later
operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the
TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily
manipulate those images without using additional software.
OR
2 Start the drawing software, such as Paint for Windows.
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows
Photo Gallery instead of Paint.
3 Click File From Scanner or Camera (Paint button From scanner or
camera for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
The Scan using Dell 1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scanner window appears.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.
Scanning 257

4 Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the
scanned picture to display the Advanced Properties dialog box.
5 Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then
click OK.
6 Click Scan to start scanning.
7 Click Save As from the File menu.
8 Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the
picture.
258 Scanning

Using a Scanner on the Network
Overview
The Scan to Server/Computer feature allows you to scan documents and send
the scanned document to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.
Computer
FTP Server
Scan
Using FTP
Using SMB
Computer
You can select the kind of the server and specify a destination to store the
scanned document with the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address
Book Editor.
The following items are required to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.
• Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following
operating systems that includes folder sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft Windows XP
Scanning 259

• Microsoft Windows Vista
• Microsoft Windows 7
• Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6
• Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account
to the FTP server (login name and password) are required.
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2, Microsoft Windows Vista, or
Microsoft Windows 7
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0
• Microsoft Windows XP
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0/4.0 or
Internet Information Services 5.0/5.1
• Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X
10.4.2/10.4.4/10.4.8/10.4.9/10.4.10/10.4.11/10.5/10.6
For information on how to configure the FTP service, contact your system
administrator.
Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.
"Confirming a Login name and Password" on page 261
"Specifying a Destination to Store the Document" on page 262
"Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 271
260 Scanning

"Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 279
Confirming a Login name and Password
When using SMB:

The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user login account with a
valid and non-empty password for authentication. Confirm a login user name
and password.
If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password
on your User Login Account with the following procedure.
For Microsoft Windows XP:

1 Click startControl PanelUser Accounts.
2 Click Change an account.
3 Select your account.
4 Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Vista and Windows 7:

1 Click StartControl Panel.
2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety.
Scanning 261

4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your
user login account.

2 Double-click User Accounts.
user login account.

user login account.
For Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6

1 Click System PreferencesAccounts.
2 Select Change Password.
3 Enter a password for your user login account in New password.
4 Re-enter the password in Verify.
After you confirmed a login user name and password, go to "Specifying a
Destination to Store the Document" on page 262.
When using FTP

The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user name and a password.
For your user name and password, contact your system administrator.
Specifying a Destination to Store the Document
When using SMB

Share a folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure.
262 Scanning

For Windows XP Home Edition:
1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of
folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.
3 Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network.
4 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the
next setting procedure.
NOTE: When the following screen appears, click If you understand the
security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here,
then select Just enable file sharing, and then click OK.
Scanning 263

5 Select Allow network users to change my files.
6 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have
created.
Example: Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on
page 271.
264 Scanning

For Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition:
folder name, MyShare) and double-click the folder.
2 Select Folder Options from Tools.
3 Click View tab, and then clear the checkbox of Use simple file sharing
(Recommended).
Scanning 265

4 Click OK, and then close the window.
5 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
6 Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the
next setting procedure.
8 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.

9 Click Add.
10 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name
in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to
confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).
266 Scanning

11 Click OK.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
12 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full
Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document
into this folder.
Scanning 267

13 Click OK.
created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
page 271.
For Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, Windows

Server 2008 R2
2 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
3 Click the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.

4 Select the Share this folder check box.
268 Scanning

NOTE: Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next
setting procedure.
6 Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder.

7 Click Add.
8 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name
in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to
confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).
Scanning 269

9 Click OK when you are done.
10 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full
Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document
to this folder.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
11 Click OK.
created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
page 271.
For Mac OS X 10.4:

1 Select Go from the Finder menu, and then click Home.
270 Scanning

2 Double-click Public.
3 Create a folder (Example of folder name, MyShare).
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next
setting procedure.
4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Check the File Sharing check box and the Windows Sharing check box.
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:

NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next
setting procedure.
2 Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.
3 Check the Shared folder check box, and then close the window.
4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Check the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.
6 Check the Share Files and folders using SMB check box and your account
name.
7 Click Done.
When Using FTP

For a destination to store the document, contact your system administrator.
Configuring the Printer Settings

You can configure the printer settings to use the Scan to Server/Computer
feature with the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar.
NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying
the IP Settings" on page 56.
3 Click Go.
Scanning 271

The printer's web page appears.
4 Click Address Book if a security login dialog box appears, type in the
correct user name and password.
NOTE: The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank
(NULL).
5 Click the Server Address tab.

6 Select any unused number and click Create.
272 Scanning

The Server Address page appears.
8
9
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
Scanning 273

1 Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the
Server address book.
2 Server Type Select SMB if you store the document in a shared folder of
your computer.
Select FTP if you use a FTP server.
3 Server Address Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the
FTP server that you have shared out.
The following are examples:
• For FTP:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.168.1.100
• For SMB:
Server name: myhost
IP address: 192.168.1.100
4 Share Name For SMB only.
On the Windows operating system, enter the share name
of the folder to store the scanned document on the
recipient computer.
On the Mac OS, enter the folder name to store the
scanned document on the recipient computer.
274 Scanning

5 Server Path For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly
without creating any subfolder, leave the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created
under the share folder, enter the path as following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level
folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\Mypic\John in your
directory.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John
In this case, enter the following item.

Server Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the server path to store the scanned document.
6 Server Port Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can
Number enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP.
7 Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared
folder on your computer or FTP server.
8 Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login
name.
NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Computer
feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user
login account. (See "Confirming a Login name and Password"
on page 261 for details on how to add a password in your
user login account.)
9 Re-enter Password Re-enter your password.
After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the

Network" on page 279.
Scanning 275

From the Address Book Editor
1 Click StartAll ProgramsDell PrintersDell 1355 Multifunction
Color Printer Address Book Editor.
The Select Device window appears.
2 Select your printer from the list.
3 Click OK.
4 Click ToolNew (Printer Address Book)Server.
The Server Address dialog box appears.
276 Scanning

1
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1 Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the

Server address book.
2 Server Type Select Computer (SMB) if you store the document in a
shared folder of your computer.
Select Server (FTP) if you use a FTP server.
3 Computer Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides
Settings wizard you through several steps.
When you complete the steps in the wizard, the items 4 to
10 are entered automatically. For details, click the Help
button.
Scanning 277

4 Sever Name/ Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the
IP Address FTP server that you have shared out.
The following are examples:
• For Computer (SMB):
Server name: myhost
IP address: 192.168.1.100
• For Server (FTP):
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.168.1.100
5 Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient
computer. For SMB only.
6 Path For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly
without creating any subfolder, leave the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created
under the share folder, enter the path as following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level
folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your
directory.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John
In this case, enter the following item.

Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the path to store the scanned document.
7 Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared
folder on your computer or FTP server.
278 Scanning

8 Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login
name.
NOTE: NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to
Server/Computer feature. Ensure that you have a valid
password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a
Login name and Password" on page 261 for details on how to
add a password in your user login account).
9 Confirm Login Re-enter your password.
Password
10 Port Number Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can
enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP.
After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the

Network" on page 279.
Sending the Scanned File on the Network

OR
3 Press the button until Scan to Network is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Ensure that Scan to is highlighted, press the button.
5 Press the button to select Network (Computer) or Network
(Server), or Search Address book, and then press the
button.
Network (Computer): Stores the scanned image on the computer by
using the SMB protocol.
Network (Server): Stores the scanned image on the server by using
the FTP protocol.
Search Address Book: Select the server address registered in
Address Book.
Scanning 279

6 Press the button to select the destination to store the scanned file in,
7 Press the (Start) button to send the scanned files.
Scanning to USB Storage Device

The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the
scanned data to a USB storage device. To scan documents and save them,
follow the steps below:
1 Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on your printer.
OR
4 Ensure that Scan to USB Memory is highlighted, and then press the
button.
5 Press the button until the your desired folder is highlighted, and then
press the button.
280 Scanning

Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image
To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your printer, follow
the steps below:
• Setup the E-mail address book through the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool. See "Setting an E-Mail Address Book" on page 281 for more
details.
Setting an E-Mail Address Book

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click Go. The
printer's Web page appears.
3 Click the Address Book tab.
The login dialog box appears.
4 Type in the administrator login ID and password registered on the printer.
5 Click Address Book.
6 Click Create.
Scanning 281

7 Enter a name and e-mail address in the Name and E-mail Address fields.
8 Click the Apply New Settings button.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File

OR
3 Press the button until Scan to Email is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Ensure that Email to is highlighted, and then press the button.
5 Press the button to select the setting listed below, and then press the
button.
282 Scanning

Keypad: Type the e-mail address directly and then press the
button.
Address Book: Select the e-mail address registered in the E-mail
address book, and then press the button.
Email Group: Select the e-mail group registered in the E-mail Groups,
NOTE: Users need to be registered before you can select Address Book
6 Press the (Start) button to send e-mail.
Scanning 283

284 Scanning

18
Faxing
Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For
example, when you set up your printer, you enter your name or your company
name and telephone number. When you store speed dial or group dial
numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.
• When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the
correct letter appears on the display.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.
– Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O
and finally 6.
– To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.
– Press the button when you are finished.
Keypad Letters and Numbers
Key Assigned numbers, letters or characters

1 @ : . / 1
2 a b c A B C 2
3 d e f D E F 3
4 g h iG H I 4
5 j k l J K L 5
Faxing 285

Key Assigned numbers, letters or characters
6 m n o M N O 6
7 p q r s P Q R S 7
8 t u v T U V 8
9 w x y z W X Y Z 9
0 0
* - _~
# @ . _ ! " # $ % & ' ~^ | ` ; : ? , (space) + - * / = ( ) [ ] { }
< >
Changing Numbers or Names

If an incorrect name or number is entered, press the (Backspace) button
to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct number or
character.
Inserting a Pause
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen
for a second dial tone. A pause must be entered in order for the access code to
function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on
the display to indicate when a pause is entered.
Configuring Fax Initial Settings

NOTE: The following settings can be configured also using Advance Tools on Easy
Setup Navigator.
Setting Your Country

You need to set the country where your printer is used for using the fax service
on the printer.
button.
286 Faxing

3 Press the button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press
the button.
5 Press the button until Country is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the button to select the country where the printer is used, and
7 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the button to select
Yes, and then press the button.
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.
NOTE: In case of either one, when you configure the country setting, the
information, which is registered to the device, is initialized.
Setting the Printer ID

In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any
fax you send. The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or
company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.
button.
button.
the button.
5 Press the button until Fax Number is highlighted, and then press
the button.
6 Enter your fax number using the number keypad.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the
(Backspace) button to delete the last digit.
7 Press the button when the number on the display is correct.
8 Press the button until Company Name is highlighted, and then press
the button.
Faxing 287

9 Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad.
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad,
including special symbols by pressing the 1, *, and # buttons.
For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric
characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters" on
page 285.
10 Press the button when the name on the display is correct.
Setting the Time and Date

NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the
printer occurs.
button.
the button.
press the button.
5 Press the button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press
the button.
6 Ensure that Set Date is highlighted, and then press the button.
7 Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad, or press the button
to select the correct date.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the button to
re-enter the digit.
8 Press the button when the date on the display is correct.
9 Press the button until Set Time is highlighted, and then press the
button.
10 Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad, or press the button
to select the correct time.
11 Press the button when the time on the display is correct.
288 Faxing

Changing the Clock Mode

You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.
button.
the button.
press the button.
5 Press the button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press
the button.
6 Press the button until Date Format is highlighted, and then press
the button.
7 Press the button until the desired format is highlighted, and then press
the button.
Setting Sounds
Speaker Volume
button.
the button.
the button.
5 Press the button until Line Monitor is highlighted, and then press
the button.
6 Press the button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then
press the button.
Faxing 289

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.
Ringer Volume
button.
the button.
the button.
5 Press the button until Ring Tone Volume is highlighted, and
6 Press the button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then
press the button.
Specifying the Fax Settings

Changing the Fax Settings Options
button.
the button.
the button.
press the button.
the value using the numeric keypad.
7 Press the button to save the selection.
290 Faxing

8 If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 7.
Available Fax Settings Options

You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:
Option Description
Receive Mode TEL Mode Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive
a fax by picking up the handset of the external
telephone, pressing the remote receive code, and then
pressing .
FAX Automatically receives faxes.
Mode*
TEL/FAX When the printer receives an incoming fax, the
Mode external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto
Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that
the call is a telephone call.
Ans/FAX The printer can share a telephone line with an
Mode answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial
transmission in your country (such as Germany,
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and
Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
Mode (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be
company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
Auto Rec Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Rec Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
TEL/FAX after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Faxing 291

Option Description
Auto Rec Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
Ans/FAX after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.
Ring Tone Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming
Volume call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive
Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Line Type Sets the line type.
Tone/Pulse Sets the dialing type.
Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the
Attempts destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not
redial.
Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone
Book.
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on
the external telephone.
Remote Rcv Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote
Tone Receive.
Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of
faxes.
Company Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to
Name 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of
faxes.
Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a
service provided by some telephone companies.
Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Settings
292 Faxing

Option Description
Fax Fwd Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming
Number faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials
Num before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the
Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto
the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the
bottom of the page.
ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote
Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or
reception error occurs.
Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every
50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Protocol Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax
Monitor transmission or only when an error occurs.
Country Sets the country where the printer is used.
Prefix Dial
NOTE: Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to the
external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must do the following from the operator
panel.
button.
the button.
Faxing 293

the button.
5 Press the button until Line Type is highlighted, and then press the
button.
6 Press the button until PBX is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Press the (Back) button to return to the previous menu.
8 Press the button until Prefix Dial is highlighted, and then press
the button.
button.
10 Press the (Back) button to return to the previous menu.
11 Press the button until Prefix Dial Num is highlighted, and then
press the button.
12 Enter an up-to-five-digit prefix number from 0–9, *, and #.
13 Press the button when the prefix dial number on the display is correct.
Advanced Fax Settings

NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect
settings on this printer may damage the device.
If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax
settings menu which you can access and change the settings accordingly.
To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Disconnect all network, phone line, and USB cables from the device.
3 Turn on the printer while holding down the and buttons.
The Customer Mode menu appears.
4 After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn
off and on the printer for the new settings to be effective.
294 Faxing

Fax Data Encoding Method
Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi-level Image
Experts Group (JBIG) data encoding method. You may experience fax send or
receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and
select the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), or Modified
Modified Read (MMR) encoding with the following instructions.
You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following
instructions.
1 When the printer is in Customer Mode, select Fax/Scanner Diag
and press the button.
2 Press the button until Parameter is highlighted, and then press the
button.
3 Press the button until FAX Parameter is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Press the button until G3M TX Coding is highlighted, and then
press the button.
5 Press the button until MMR is highlighted, and then press the
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR to enable MR encoding, or
select MH to enable MH encoding.
You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.
1 When the printer is in Customer Mode, select Fax/Scanner Diag
2 Press the button until Parameter is highlighted, and then press the
button.
3 Press the button until FAX Parameter is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Press the button until G3M RX Coding is highlighted, and then
press the button.
5 Press the button until MMR is highlighted, and then press the
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR to enable MR encoding, or
select MH to enable MH encoding.
Faxing 295

Sending a Fax
You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred
from the computer running a Microsoft® Windows® operating system.
Loading an Original Document on the ADF

NOTICE: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35
sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied
before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the
document glass instead of the ADF.
1 Place the document(s) face up on the ADF with the top edge of the
documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the correct
document size.
2 Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 298.
Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass

296 Faxing

2 Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.
3 Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 298.

NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the
ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.
NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.
Faxing 297

Resolution
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission:
1 Press the (Fax) button.
2 Press the button until Resolution is highlighted, and then press
the button.
press the button.
Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin
lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail.
The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine
also supports the super fine resolution.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest
resolution supported by the receiving device.
Document Type
To select the default document type for the current fax job:
2 Press the button until Document Type is highlighted, and then
press the button.
button.

298 Faxing

Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original:
2 Press the button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then
press the button.
3 Press the or button to select the desired setting, and then press the
button.
Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with
Lighter1 dark print.

Darker1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with
Darker2 light print or faint pencil markings.
Sending a Fax Automatically

1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF:
OR
document cover.
3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.
4 You can select a fax number in one of the following ways:
• Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the button.
Press the button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then
press the button. Press the button to select the recipients.
• Press the One Touch Dial button.
Faxing 299

• Press the (Contacts) button, select All Entries, Group
Dial, or Search using the button, and then press the
button.
All Entries Displays a list of registered fax numbers. Press the

button to select the recipients.
Group Dial Press the button to select the recipients.
Search Searches a fax number from the Phone Book. Enter
the text you want to search, and then press the
button. Press the button to select the recipients.
• Press the (Redial/Pause) button to redial.

• Press the (Speed Dial) button. Enter the speed dial number
between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad, and then press the
button.
NOTE: Before you use the One Touch Dial button, you need to register a
number for the speed dial. For more information on how to store the number,
see "Automatic Dialing" on page 311.
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for
another page. Press the button to select Yes or No, and then press the
button.
6 The number is dialed and then the printer begins sending the fax when the
remote fax machine is ready.
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button to cancel the fax job at any time while
sending the fax.
Sending a Fax Manually

OR
document cover.
300 Faxing

4 Press the button until OnHook is highlighted, and then press the
button.
button.
6 Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric
keypad.
• If the document is loaded on the ADF, press the (Start) button.
• If the document is not loaded on the ADF, press the (Start)
button, press the button until the desired setting appears, and
NOTE: Press the (Cancel) button and the button to cancel the fax job at
any time while sending the fax.
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer
beeps and returns to the standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on
the display.
If you receive an error message, press the (Cancel) button to clear the
message and try to send the document again.
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after
each fax transmission. For more information, see "Printing a Report" on
page 319.
Faxing 301

Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a
fax, the printer will automatically redial the number every minute based on
the number set in the redial settings.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial
attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.
NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the
number was manually entered.
Sending a Delayed Fax

The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for
transmission at a specified time in order to take advantage of lower long
distance rates.
OR
document cover.
4 Press the button until Delayed Start is highlighted, and then
press the button.
button.
6 Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press the or
button to select the start time, and then press the button.
7 Press the button until Fax to is highlighted, and then press the
button.
8 Ensure that Keypad is highlighted, and then press the button.
302 Faxing

9 Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad, and
You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers. For more information,
see "Automatic Dialing" on page 311.
Press the (Start) button to begin faxing.
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all the documents
to be faxed to its memory and sends them at the specified time. After faxing
in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as
the printer is activated.
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)

You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
Example
Send data via the Dell 1355cnw Send fax

Color MFP FAX driver
Sending machine (Dell Receiving machine (fax
1355cn Multifunction machine/multifunction
Color Printer) printer)
For Microsoft Windows:

NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those
given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using.
NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver.
1 Open the file you want to send by fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell
1355cnw Color MFP FAX.
3 Click Preferences.
Faxing 303

4 The Printing Preferences dialog box appears. Specify the fax settings. For
more information, click the Help of the driver.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
304 Faxing

5 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
6 Click Print. The Set / Check Fax Transmission: dialog box appears.
7 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
• Enter a name and phone number directly.
• Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.
• Select a recipient from a database other than a phone book or address
book.
For more information on how to specify the destination, see the Help of
the driver.
Faxing 305

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area
before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked with a password.
8 Click Start Sending.
For Apple Macintosh:

NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those
given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using.
NOTE: When using a USB connection on Mac OS 10.4.x, upgrade Common Unix
Printing System (CUPS) software to version 1.2.12 or later. You can download it from
CUPS web site.
1 Open the file you want to send by fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell 1355
Color MFP Fax.
306 Faxing

3 Specify the fax settings.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
4 Click Print. The Fax Recipient dialog box appears.
5 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
• Enter a name and phone number directly.
• Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.
Faxing 307

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area
before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked with a password.
6 Click OK.
Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering
machine to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the TEL Mode.
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes

The instructions for loading paper in the PSI are the same whether you are
printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-,
A4-, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print
Media" on page 201. For details about setting the paper type and size in the
PSI, see "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189.
308 Faxing

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a
specified period of time and receives the fax.
To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after
receiving an incoming call, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode

You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone, and
then pressing the (Start) button.
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the
reception is completed.
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans/Fax Mode

To use the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode, you must attach an external
telephone to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it
would normally. If your printer hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically
starts to receive a fax.
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Auto Answer Fax and your answering
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your printer,
your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone

This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected
to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer. You can receive a fax
from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having to
go to the printer.
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press
the two-digit keys on the external telephone, or set On Hook to Off and
then press the (Start) button.
The printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try pressing the two-digit keys once again.
Faxing 309

The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. You can change the two-
digit number to whatever you choose. For details on changing the code, see
"Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.
NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode

The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The
particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short
ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring
service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.
To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your FAX
number from outside.
To set up the DRPD:
button.
the button.
the button.
5 Press the button until DRPD Pattern is highlighted, and then press
the button.
press the button.
To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD Mode; see
"Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.
Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from
your telephone company, ask your telephone company which pattern you
need to select to use this service.
310 Faxing

Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing,
or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the memory.
Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables,
the printer automatically prints the fax.
Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive
it.
2 Press the button until Polling Receive is highlighted, and then
press the button.
button.
4 Enter the fax number of the remote machine, and then press the
button.
NOTE: For information on how to enter the fax number of the remote machine,
see "Sending a Fax Manually" on page 300 or "Sending a Fax Automatically" on
page 299.
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (01–
99).
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you
cannot change the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing

Faxing 311

button.
the button.
4 Press the button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press
the button.
5 Ensure that Speed Dial is highlighted, and then press the button.
6 Press the button until the desired speed dial number between 01 and
99 is highlighted, and then press the button.
7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the button.
8 Enter the name, and then press the button.
9 Ensure that Phone Number is highlighted, and then press the
button.
10 Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then
press the button.
To insert a pause between numbers, press the (Redial/Pause) button.
"-" appears on the display.
11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
13 To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial

OR
document cover.
312 Faxing

2 To enter the speed dial number do either of the following after pressing the
(Fax) button:
• Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the button.
Press the button until Speed Dial is highlighted, and then
press the button.
• Press the (Speed Dial) button.
3 Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad,
The corresponding entry's name briefly displays. To confirm the name
again, press the button.
6 The document scans to the memory.
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for
another page. Press the button to select Yes to add more documents
or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately, and then press the
button.
7 The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed.
The document is sent when the remote fax machine answers.
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple
locations. For example, if you enter 0*, you can send a document to the locations
registered between 01 and 09.
Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can
create a group of these destinations and set them under a one-digit group dial
location. This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the
same document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial
number.
Faxing 313

Setting Group Dial
button.
the button.
the button.
5 Press the button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press
the button.
6 Press the button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6
is highlighted, and then press the button.
7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the button.
8 Enter the name, and then press the button.
9 Ensure that Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then press the
button.
10 Press the button until the desired number is highlighted, press the
button to select the speed dial numbers, and then press the button.
11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
13 To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
Editing Group Dial

You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a
new number to the selected group.
button.
314 Faxing

the button.
the button.
5 Press the button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press
the button.
6 Press the button until the group dial number that you want to edit is
highlighted, and then press the button.
7 To change the group dial name:
a Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the button.
b Enter a new name, and then press the button.
c Press the button until Apply settings is highlighted, and
d Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the button to
select Yes, and then press the button.
8 To change the speed dial number:
a Press the button until Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then
press the button.
b Press the button until the speed dial number that you want to edit
is highlighted, and then press the button to select or deselect the
speed dial number. Press the button.
c Press the button until Apply settings is highlighted, and
d Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the button to
9 To delete the group dial:
a Press the (Backspace) button.
b Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the button to
NOTE: When you delete the last speed dial in a group, the group itself is not
deleted.
10 If you want to edit another group dial number or enter a new group dial
number, repeat steps 5 to 9.
Faxing 315

Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)

You can use group dialing for broadcasting or delayed transmissions.
Follow the procedure of the desired operation (For Delayed transmission, see
"Specifying the Fax Settings" on page 290).
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the
procedure to complete the desired operation.
Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic
Document Feeder or on the document glass into the memory. The printer
dials each of the numbers included in the group.
Printing an Address Book List

You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a speed dial list.
button.
the button.
4 Press the button until Address Book is highlighted, and then press
the button.
A list of your speed dial entries is printed.
Other Ways to Fax

Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure
Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the
printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will get
saved in the memory. When the mode turns off, any faxes stored will be
printed.
NOTE: Before operation, ensure that Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
316 Faxing

To turn the secure receiving mode on:
button.
the button.
4 Press the button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then
press the button.
5 Press the button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then
press the button.
6 Ensure that Secure Receive Set is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Press the button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the
button.
NOTE: The factory-default password is 0000.
8 To return to the standby mode, press the (Menu) button.
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it
into memory and the Job Status screen displays "Secure Receive"
to let you know that there is a fax stored.
NOTE: If you change the password while Secure Receive Set is
Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the button until Change
Password is highlighted, and then press the button. Enter the new
password, and then press the button.
To print received documents:
2 Press the button until Job Status is highlighted, and then press
the button.
3 Press the button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then
press the button.
4 Enter the password, and then press the button.
The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
Faxing 317

1 Access the Secure Receive Set menu by following steps 1 to 6 in
"To turn the secure receiving mode on:".
2 Press the button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the
button.
Using an Answering Machine
To the Printer Line Telephone Answering Device Phone

wall jack
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of
your printer as shown above.
• Set your printer to the Ans/FAX Mode and set Auto Rec Ans/FAX
to specify the time for the TAD.
• When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if
fax tones are received and then starts receiving the fax.
• If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Fax
after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time.
• If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call
if you
Set On Hook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote
machine), and then press the (Start) button and hang up the receiver.
OR
Press the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.
318 Faxing

Using a Computer Modem
Line
Printer Telephone Answering Device Phone
To the Computer
internet
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet
connection, connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer
with the TAD as shown above.
• Set your printer to the Ans/FAX Mode and set Auto Rec. Ans/FAX
to specify the time for the TAD.
• Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.
• Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a
fax.
• Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax
application to fax via the computer modem.
Printing a Report
The following reports may be useful when using fax:
Address Book
This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer
as Address Book information.
Fax Activity
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Protocol Monitor
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Procedures:
Faxing 319

button.
the button.
4 Press the button until the report or list you want to print is
highlighted, and then press the button.
The selected report or list is printed.
Changing Setting Options

button.
3 Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the
button.
4 Press the button until Fax Defaults is highlighted, and then press
the button.
press the button.
the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the button.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
320 Faxing

Know Your Printer
321

322

19
Understanding the Tool Box Menus
The Tool Box allows you to view or specify the system settings. You can also
diagnose the system settings by using the Tool Box.
The Tool Box consists of the Printer Settings Report, Printer Maintenance,
and Diagnosis tabs.
NOTE: The Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings
on ToolBox when Panel Lock is set on the printer. In this case, enter the password
you specified, and click OK to apply the settings.
NOTE: For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer Software
(Windows Only)" on page 409.
Printer Settings Report

The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Printer Information, Menu
Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, Defaults Settings, and Fax
Settings pages.
Printer Information
Purpose:
To display the information of your printer.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number Displays Dell’s service tag number.

Express Service Code Displays the express service code of the printer.
Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer.
Printer Type Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is
displayed normally.
Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag of the printer.
Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.
Understanding the Tool Box Menus 323

Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.
Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller.
Network Firmware Version Displays the NIC version.
MCU Firmware Version Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit
(MCU) firmware.
Printing Speed (Color) Displays the speed for color printing.
Printing Speed Displays the speed for monochrome printing.
(Monochrome)
Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of your printer.
Values:
System Settings Sleep Displays the time taken by the

printer before it enters Sleep mode
after it finishes a job.
Deep Sleep Displays the time taken by the
printer before it enters Deep Sleep
mode after it goes into Sleep
mode.
Auto Reset Displays the time taken by the
printer before it automatically
resets the settings for Copy, Scan,
or Fax on the operator panel to the
defaults when no additional
settings are made.
Panel Select Tone Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when the operator
panel input is correct. Off
Panel Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when the operator
panel input is incorrect. Off
324 Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Job Tone Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when a job is
complete. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.
Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when a problem
occurs. Off indicates that the tone
is disabled.
Out of Paper Tone Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted when the printer
runs out of paper. Off indicates
that the tone is disabled.
Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone
that is emitted 5 seconds before
the printer performs auto clear.
Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.
All Tones Displays the volume of all the alert
tones. Off indicates that all the
tones are disabled.
Job Time-Out Displays the amount of time that
the printer waits for data to arrive
from the computer.
Fault Time-Out Displays the time taken by the
printer before it cancels jobs that
stop abnormally.
Panel Language Displays the language used on the
operator panel.
Auto Log Print*1 Displays whether to automatically
print a job history report after
every 20 jobs.
mm/inch Displays the measurement unit
used after the numeric value on
the operator panel.

Date & Time Date Format Displays the default date format.
Time Format Displays the default time format;
24H or 12H.
Time Zone Displays the default time zone.
Set Date Displays the date setting.
Set Time Displays the time setting.
Paper Density Plain Displays the paper density of plain
paper.
Label Displays the paper density of
labels.
Adjust BTR Plain Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for plain paper.
Plain Thick Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for thick plain paper.
Recycled Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for recycled paper.
Covers Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for cover paper.
Coated Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for coated paper.
Envelope Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for envelopes.
Label Displays the voltage setting of the
transfer roller for labels.

Adjust Fuser Plain Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for plain paper.
Plain Thick Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for thick plain paper.
Recycled Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for recycled paper.
Covers Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for cover paper.
Coated Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for coated paper.
Envelope Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for envelopes.
Label Displays the temperature setting
of the fuser for labels.
Auto Registration Displays whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Adjustment
Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
Non-Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
BTR Refresh Displays whether to execute counter measures for
Mode curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Web Link Select Displays a link used for ordering consumables.
Customization Reorder URL
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna).
(http://premier.dell.com).
*1
If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.
Reports
Purpose:
To print the settings and history information of your printer.
The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings. The
default is A4 or Letter.
Values:

System Settings Click to print a detailed list of the system settings.
Panel Settings Click to print a detailed list of the panel settings.
Job History Click to print the completed jobs history.
Error History Click to print the error history.
Demo Page Click to print the Demo Page.
Address Book List Click to print the list of Personal Address, Fax Group,
and E-mail Group stored as Address Book.
TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol.
Values:
IP Address Mode Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.

IP Address Displays the IP address of your printer.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Gateway Address Displays the gateway address.
Tray Settings
Purpose:
To display the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF).
Values:
Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.

Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.
Custom Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the
MPF.

Custom Size - X Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the
MPF.
Display Popup Displays whether to use a popup menu that prompts
the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the
paper is loaded in the MPF.
Defaults Settings
Purpose:
To display the default scan, fax, and copy settings of the printer.
Values:
Scan Scan To Displays whether to store scanned image on a network

Defaults Network server or on a computer.
File Format Displays the file format to save the scanned image.
Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and
white.
Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.
Document Displays the default document size.
Size
Lighter/Dark Displays the default scan density level.
er
Auto Displays whether to suppress the background of the
Exposure original to enhance text on the scanned image.
Top/Bottom
Left/Right
Margin Displays the value of the middle margin.
Middle
Image Displays the image compression level.
Compression
Max E-Mail Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Size

Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax
transmission.
Lighter/Dark Displays the default density level to be used for fax
er transmission.
Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.
Copy Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in black
Defaults and white.
Reduce/Enlar Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
ge
Original Type Displays the default document type.
Document Displays the default document size.
Size
Lighter/Dark Displays the default copy density level.
er
Auto Displays whether to suppress the background of the
Exposure original to enhance text on the copy.
Color Displays the color balance level of red.
Balance
(Red)
Color Displays the color balance level of green.
Balance
(Green)
Color Displays the color balance level of blue.
Balance
(Blue)
Gray Balance Displays the gray balance level.
Multiple-Up Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up feature.
Collated Displays whether to sort the copy job.
Top/Bottom
Left/Right
Margin Displays the value of the middle margin.
Middle

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To display the basic fax settings.
Values:
Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.

Auto Rec Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the
fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Rec Fax/Tel Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the
fax receive mode after the external telephone receives
an incoming call.
Auto Rec Ans/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the
fax receive mode after the external answering machine
Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly
monitors a transmission through the internal speaker
until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates
that an incoming call is a telephone call through the
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.
Line Type Displays the line type.
Tone/Pulse Displays the dialing type.
Resend Delay Displays the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts.
Redial Delay Displays the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted
numbers.
Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote
receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone Displays the remote receive code to start Remote
Receive.
Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of sender on
the header of faxes.

Fax Header Name Displays the name of sender to be printed on the
header of faxes.
Fax Number Displays the fax number to be printed on the header
of faxes.
Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) setting.
Sent Fax Fwd Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a
specified destination.
Fax Fwd Number Displays the fax number of the destination to which
incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials
before any auto dial number is started.
Discard Size Displays whether to discard text or images at the
bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit
onto the output paper.
ECM Displays whether to enable the Error Correction Mode
(ECM).
Modem Speed Displays the fax modem speed when a fax
transmission or reception error occurs.
Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity
report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.
Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission report after
every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report after
every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only
when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol Displays whether to print a protocol monitor report
after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.
Country Displays the country where the printer is used.

Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the System Settings, Date & Time,
Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust Fuser, Registration Adjustment, Adjust
Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, BTR Refresh Mode, Web Link
Customization, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, EWS, Scan Defaults, Fax
Defaults, Copy Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the power saving mode, auto clear time, warning tones, time-out
time, operator panel language settings, job log auto print, and mm/inch
setting.
Values:
Power Saver Sleep*1 5 minutes* Specifies the time taken by

Timer 5– 30 minutes the printer before it enters
Sleep mode after it finishes
a job.
Deep Sleep 6 minutes* Specifies the time taken by
1–6 minutes the printer before it enters
Deep Sleep mode after it
goes into Sleep mode.
Auto Reset 45 seconds* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it
1 minute automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax
on the operator panel to the defaults when no
2 minutes additional settings are made.
3 minutes
4 minutes
Alert Tone Panel Select Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator
Tone panel input is correct.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume
Medium when the operator panel input is correct.
High

Panel Alert Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator
Tone panel input is incorrect.
Medium when the operator panel input is
incorrect.
High
Job Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job is
complete.
Medium* when a job is complete.
High
Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem
occurs.
Medium* when a problem occurs.
High
Out of Paper Off Does not emit a tone when the printer
Tone runs out of paper.
Medium* when the printer runs out of paper.
High
Auto Clear Off* Does not emit a tone before the printer
Alert Tone performs auto clear.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume 5
Medium seconds before the printer performs auto
clear.
High
All Tones Off Disables all the alert tones.
Low Specifies the volume of all the alert tones
Medium at once.
High

Job Time- 0 Disables the job time-out.
Out 30 seconds* Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for
5–300 data to arrive from the computer. The print job is
seconds cancelled if it times out.
Fault Time- 0 Disables the fault time-out.

Out 60 seconds* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels
3–300 jobs that stop abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it
seconds times out.
Panel English* Specifies the language to be used on the operator panel.

Language Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Nederlands
Dansk
Norsk
Svenska
Auto Log Off* Does not automatically print a job history report.
Print*2 On Automatically prints a job history report after every 20
jobs.
mm/inch*3 millimeter Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the
(mm) numeric value on the operator panel.
inch (")
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, press the Apply New
Settings button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button
settings to apply the changes.

*1
Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the Sleep mode five minutes after it finishes a job.
This uses less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your
printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this
keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value
between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance
between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the Sleep mode when it
receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode
by pressing any button on the operator panel.
*2
If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.
*3 The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Date & Time

Purpose:
Values:
Date Format Specifies the date format; yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or

dd/mm/yy.
Time Format Specifies the time format; 24H or 12H.
Paper Density
Purpose:
Values:
Plain Normal* Specifies the paper density of plain paper.

Light

Label Normal* Specifies the paper density of labels.
Light
Adjust BTR
Purpose:
values.
Values:
Plain 0*
-3 – +3
Plain Thick 0*
-3 – +3
Recycled 0*
-3 – +3
Covers 0*
-3 – +3
Coated 0*
-3 – +3
Envelope 0*
-3 – +3
Label 0*
-3 – +3
Apply New After you complete the settings, press the Apply New Settings

Adjust Fuser
Purpose:
Values:
Plain 0*
-3 – +3
Plain Thick 0*
-3 – +3
Recycled 0*
-3 – +3
Covers 0*
-3 – +3
Coated 0*
-3 – +3
Envelope 0*
-3 – +3
Label 0*
-3 – +3
Apply New After you complete the settings, press the Apply New Settings
Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To set Color Registration Adjustment (individual yellow, magenta, cyan
correction) settings. When Auto Registration Adjustment is set to On, the
printer prints the color registration chart and adjusts the color registration by

using the chart. Color registration adjustment need to be made during the
initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to a different
location.
Values:
Auto Registration On* Automatically adjusts color registration.

Adjustment Off Does not automatically adjust color registration.
*1
Auto Correct Click Start to automatically correct color
registration.
Print Color Regi Chart*1,*2 Click Start to print a color registration chart.
Color Yellow 0* Specifies lateral (perpendicular to
Registration -5–+5 paper feed direction) color
Adjustment 1 adjustment values individually.
(Lateral)*1 Magenta 0*
-5–+5
Cyan 0*
-5–+5
Color LY(Left 0* Specifies process (paper feed
Registration Yellow) -5–+5 direction) color adjustment values
Adjustment 2 individually.
(Process)*1 LM(Left 0*
Magenta) -5–+5
LC(Left 0*
Cyan) -5–+5
RY(Right 0*
Yellow) -5–+5
RM(Right 0*
Magenta) -5–+5
RC(Right 0*
Cyan) -5–+5
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, press the Apply
New Settings button to apply the changes.

*1
This item is available only when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.
*2
The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan
lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next to the line that is
perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color
registration is not needed. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify
the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustment.
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
Values:
0 meter* Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer

1000 meters is installed.
2000 meters
3000 meters
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters or Address
Book data. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu
parameters or data are reset to their default values.
For details, see "Resetting Defaults" on page 357.
Values:
System Section Click to initialize the system parameters.

User Fax Section Click to initialize the fax number entries in the
Address Book.
User Scan Section Click to initialize the e-mail and server address entries
in the Address Book.
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
the printer.
Values:
Non-Dell Off* Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Toner On Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
BTR Refresh Mode

Purpose:
To execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Values:
BTR Refresh Off* Does not automatically execute counter measures for
Mode curling/separating discharge of the paper.
On Automatically executes counter measures for
curling/separating discharge of the paper.

Web Link Customization
Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables.
Values:
Select Reorder URL Select the Regular or Premier URL.

Regular* Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna).
(http://premier.dell.com).
TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Values:
IP Address AutoIP* Automatically sets the IP address.

Mode BOOTP Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
RARP Uses RARP to set the IP address.
DHCP Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Panel Manually sets the IP address.
IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.
Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.
Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address.

Tray Settings
Purpose:
To specify the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF).
Values:
Paper Type Plain* Specifies the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain Side 2
Plain Thick
Side 2
Covers Side 2
Coated
Side 2
Recycled
Side 2

Paper Size A4*1 Specifies the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
A5
B5
Letter*1
Folio
Legal
Executive
Envelope
#10
Monarch
Monarch
Landscape
DL
DL
Landscape
C5
Custom Size
Custom Size 297 Specifies the length of custom size paper.
-Y mm*/11.7
inch*
127–355
mm/5.0–14.0
inch
Custom Size 210 mm*/8.3 Specifies the width of custom size paper.
-X inch*
77–215
mm/3.0–8.5
inch
Display On* Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set
Popup Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in
the MPF.
Off Does not display a popup menu.

*1
The default for Paper Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.
EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool)

Purpose:
To display the server settings of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, this setting cannot be
displayed.
Values:
Print Server Settings Click Display to display the server settings for the Dell
Display of On* Turns on the display of the server settings for the Dell
EWS Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Off Turns off the display of the server settings for the Dell
Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Values:
Scan To Computer Stores the scanned image on a computer using the

Network (Network)* Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Server (FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP
protocol.
File Format TIFF Saves the scanned image in TIFF.
PDF* Saves the scanned image in PDF.
JPEG Saves the scanned image in JPEG.

Color Black & Scans in black and white mode.
White
GrayScale Scan in grayscale mode.
Color* Scans in color mode.
Color(Photo) Scans in color mode. This is suitable for photographic
images.
Resolution 200* Scans an image at 200dpi.
300 Scans an image at 300dpi.
*1
Document A4 Sets the document size to A4.
Size A5 Sets the document size to A5.
B5 Sets the document size to B5.
*1
Letter Sets the document size to Letter.
Folio Sets the document size to Folio.
Legal Sets the document size to Legal.
Executive Sets the document size to Executive.
Lighter/Dark Lighter 2 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original.
er Lighter 1 Works well with dark print.

Darker 1 Makes the scanned image darker than the original.
Darker 2 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Sharpness Softest Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
Softer
Normal* Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer
than the original.
Sharper Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.
Sharpest
Auto On* Suppresses the background of the original to enhance
Exposure text on the scanned image.
Off Does not suppress the background.

Margin 2 mm*/0.1 Specifies the value of the top and bottom margins.
Top/Bottom inch*
0–50
mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Margin 2 mm*/0.1 Specifies the value of the left and right margins.
Left/Right inch*
0–50
mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Margin 0 mm*/0.0 Specifies the value of the middle margin.
Middle inch*
0–50
mm/0.0–2.0
inch
Image High Sets the image compression level to High.
Compression Medium* Sets the image compression level to Medium.
Low Sets the image compression level to Low.
Max E-Mail Size Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent,
within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The
default is 2048 K bytes.
*1
The default for Document Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
Values:

Resolution Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or
thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix
printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine
detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the Super Fine
resolution.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic
images.
Lighter/Dark Lighter 2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well
er Lighter 1 with dark print.

Darker 1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well
Darker 2 with light print or faint pencil markings.
Delayed Start 21:00* Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax
00:00–23:59 at a specified time.
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:
Color Black & Prints in black and white mode.

White
Color* Prints in color mode.

Reduce/ mm series Custom Sets the default reduction/enlargement
Enlarge ratio to the custom size.
200% Sets the default enlargement ratio when
A5A4 you set the default measurement unit to
(141%) millimeter.
A5B5
(122%)
100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a
copied image.
B5A5 Sets the default reduction ratio when you
(81%) set the default measurement unit to
A4A5 millimeter.
(70%)
50%
inch series 200% Sets the default enlargement ratio when
Statement you set the default measurement unit to
Legal (154%) inch.
Statement
Letter (129%)
100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a
copied image.
LegalLetter Sets the default reduction ratio when you
(78%) set the default measurement unit to inch.
Ledger
Letter (64%)
50%
Custom 100%* Reduces or enlarges the image to the
Reduce/ 25–400% custom size when Reduce/Enlarge is set
Enlarge to Custom.
Original Type Text Suitable for documents with text.
Text & Suitable for documents with both text
Photo* and photos/gray tones.

Document A4*1 Sets the document size to A4.
Size A5 Sets the document size to A5.
B5 Sets the document size to B5.
*1
Letter Sets the document size to Letter.
Folio Sets the document size to Folio.
Legal Sets the document size to Legal.
Executive Sets the document size to Executive.
Lighter/Dark Lighter 2 Makes the copy lighter than the original.
er Lighter 1 Works well with dark print.
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed

documents.
Darker 1 Makes the copy darker than the original.
Darker 2 Works well with light print or faint pencil
markings.
Sharpness Softest Makes the copy softer than the original.
Softer
Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer
than the original.
Sharper Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Sharpest
Auto On* Suppresses the background of the original
Exposure to enhance text on the copy.
Color 0* Sets the color balance level of red.
Balance -2– 2
(Red)
Color 0* Sets the color balance level of green.
Balance -2– 2
(Green)
Color 0* Sets the color balance level of blue.
Balance -2– 2
(Blue)
Gray Balance 0* Sets the gray balance level.
-2– 2

Multiple-Up Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto Automatically reduces the original pages
to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of
paper in the original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto the one
sheet of paper in the size specified in
Reduce/Enlarge.
Collated Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job.
Collated Sorts the copy job.
Auto Automatically determines which output
mode for the copy job.
Margin 4 mm*/0.2 Specifies the value of the top and bottom
Top/Bottom inch* margins.
0-50 mm/0.0-
2.0 inch
Margin 4 mm*/0.2 Specifies the value of the left and right
Left/Right inch* margins.
0-50 mm/0.0-
2.0 inch
Margin 0 mm*/0.0 Specifies the value of the middle margin.
Middle inch*
0-50 mm/0.0-
2.0 inch
Apply New Settings After you complete the settings, press the
Apply New Settings button to apply the
changes.
*1
The default for Document Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Fax Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic fax settings.
Values:

Receive Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive
Mode a fax by picking up the handset of the external
telephone, pressing the remote receive code, and then
pressing .
Fax* Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fa When the printer receives an incoming fax, the
x external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto
Rec Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that
the call is a telephone call.
Ans The printer can share a telephone line with an
Machine/Fax answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial
transmission in your country (such as Germany,
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and
Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be
company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
Auto Rec Fax 0* Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
0–255 receive mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Rec 6* Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
Fax/Tel 0–255 receive mode after the external telephone receives an
incoming call.
Auto Rec 21* Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
Ans/Fax 0–255 receive mode after the external answering machine

Line Monitor Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor.
Low Specifies the volume of the line monitor, which
Medium* audibly monitors a transmission through the internal
speaker until a connection is made.
High
Ring Tone Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone.
Volume Low Specifies the volume of the ring tone, which indicates
Medium that an incoming call is a telephone call through the
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
High* Telephone/Fax.
Line Type PSTN* Sets the line type to PSTN.
PBX Sets the line type to PBX.
Tone/Pulse Tone* Sets the dialing type to Tone.
Pulse(10PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).
)
Pulse(20PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).
)
Resend Delay 8* Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.
3–255
Redial 3* Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when
Attempts 0–9 the destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the
printer will not redial.
Redial Delay 1* Specifies the interval between redial attempts.
1–15
Junk Fax Off* Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
Setup On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered
in the Phone Book.
Remote Off* Disables the remote receive feature.
Receive On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the
external telephone after picking up the handset of the
telephone.
Remote Rcv 00* Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start
Tone 00–99 Remote Receive.

Fax Header On* Prints the information of sender on the header of
faxes.
Off Does not print the information of sender on the
header of faxes.
Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of
faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.
Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the
header of faxes.
Fax Cover Off* Does not attach a cover page to faxes.
Page On Attaches a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern 4* Provides a separate number for faxing with a
Pattern Pattern 1–7 distinctive ring pattern.
Sent Fax Fwd Off* Does not forward incoming faxes.

Forward Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified
destination.
Print and Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified
Forward destination and prints all forwarded incoming faxes.
Fax Fwd Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which
incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Off* Does not set a prefix dial number.
On Sets a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This
number dials before any auto dial number is started. It
is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch
Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size Off Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without
discarding it.
On Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.
Auto Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the
Reduction* output paper.
ECM On* Enables the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote
Off Disables the ECM.

Modem 2.4 Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax
Speed 4.8 transmission or reception error occurs.
9.6
14.4
33.6*
Fax Activity Auto Print* Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.
No Auto Does not automatically print a fax activity report.
Print
Fax Transmit Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax
transmission.
Print On Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Error*
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax
transmission.
Fax Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax
Broadcast transmission to multiple destinations.
Print On Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Error
Print Always* Prints a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations.
Fax Protocol Print Does not print a protocol monitor report.
Disable*
Print On Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error
Error occurs.
Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission.
Country Selects the country where the printer is used.

Diagnosis
The Diagnosis tab contains the Chart Print, Environment Sensor Info,
Clean Developer, and Refresh Mode pages.
Chart Print
Purpose:
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosing your printer.
Values:
Pitch Configuration Chart Click to print full halftone pages for yellow, magenta,
cyan, and black. Also outputs pages to check the pitch.
Ghost Configuration Chart Click to print a chart to check for ghost printing.
4 Colors Configuration Click to print bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and
Chart black with varying density.
MQ Chart Click to print charts to check for the binding.
Alignment Chart Click to print a chart, and then check for proper
alignment of the print image on the paper.
PHD Refresh Configuration Click to print a chart to check the light fatigue of the
Chart PHD unit.
Environment Sensor Info

Purpose:
To output the internal environment sensor information of the printer to
Result by pressing the Get Environment Sensor Info button.
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Values:

Clean Developer Click Start to stir the toner.
Refresh Mode
Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its
life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
NOTE: Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner.
Values:
Toner Refresh Yellow Click to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
Mode Magenta Click to clean the toner in the magenta toner
cartridge.
Cyan Click to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
Black Click to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.
Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters
or data are reset to their default values.
NOTE:
The Tool Box opens.
3 Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reset Defaults page is displayed.
4 Select the desired option button.


20
Understanding the Printer Menus
When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of
users, the access to the Admin Menu menus can be limited. This prevents
unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the
default menu settings that has been set by the administrator. However, you
can use select settings for individual print jobs using the printer driver. Print
settings selected from the printer driver have precedence over the default
menu settings selected from the operator panel.
Defaults Settings
Use the Defaults Settings menu to configure the default copy, scan,
and fax settings of the printer.
Copy Defaults
Use the Copy Defaults menus to configure a variety of copy features.
Color
Purpose:
To set whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
Values:
Black & White Prints in black and white mode.

Color* Prints in color mode.
Collated
Purpose:
To sort the copy job.
Values:
Understanding the Printer Menus 359

Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job.
Collated Sorts the copy job.
Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job.
Reduce/Enlarge
Purpose:
To set the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Values:
mm series
200%
A5A4 (141%)
A5B5 (122%)
100%*
B5A5 (81%)
A4A5 (70%)
50%
inch series
200%
StmtLgl (154%)
StmtLtr (129%)
100%*
LglLtr (78%)
LdgrLtr (64%)
50%
360 Understanding the Printer Menus

NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from
25% to 400%, or press to enlarge the zoom ratio or press to reduce the zoom
ratio in 1% intervals.
Manual.
Document Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1

A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
*1 The default for Document Size
varies depending on country-
Original Type
Purpose:
To select the copy image quality.
Values:

Text & Photo* Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.

Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Values:
Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark
Lighter1 print.

Darker1 Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print
Darker2 or faint pencil markings.
Sharpness
Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.
Softest
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:

On* Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the
copy.

Color Balance R
Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of red within the range of -2 to +2.
Color Balance G
Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of green within the range of -2 to
+2.
Color Balance B
Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of blue within the range of -2 to +2.
Gray Balance
Purpose:
To specify the default gray balance level within the range of -2 to +2.
Multiple-Up
Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of
paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size
specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
Margin Top/Bottom
Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:

4 mm*/0.2 inch* Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Margin Left/Right
Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Margin Middle
Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Scan Defaults
Use the Scan Defaults menus to configure a variety of scanner features.
Scan to Network
Purpose:
To store the scanned image on a network server or on a computer.
Values:

Network Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message
(Computer)* Block (SMB) protocol.
Network Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.
(Server)
File Format
Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF*
TIFF
JPEG
Color
Purpose:
To set whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Values:
Black & White Scans in black and white mode.

Color* Scans in color mode.
Color Button Set

Purpose:
To assign color mode to the color mode switch button.
Values:

B&W Button Black & White* Scans in black and white when Black &
White is selected for a color mode.
Grayscale Scans in gray scale when Black & White is
selected for a color mode.
Color Button Color* Scans in color when Color is selected for a
color mode.
Color (Photo) Scans in color (Photo) when Color is
selected for a color mode. This is suitable for
photographic images.
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the default scan resolution.
Values:
200 x 200 dpi*

300 x 300 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
Document Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1

A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")
*1
The default for Document Size
varies depending on country-
Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To set the default scan density level.
Values:
Lighter2 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with
Lighter1 dark print.

Darker1 Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with
Darker2 light print or faint pencil markings.
Sharpness
Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal* Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the
original.
Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
Softest
Auto Exposure
Purpose:

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned
image.
Values:

On* Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the
scanned image.
Margin Top/Bottom
Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Margin Left/Right
Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Margin Middle
Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:

0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch
Image Compression
Purpose:
To specify the image compression level.
Values:
High Sets the image compression level to High.

Medium* Sets the image compression level to Medium.
Low Sets the image compression level to Low.
Max EMail Size

Purpose:
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of
50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default is 2048 K bytes.
Fax Defaults
Use the Fax Defaults menus to configure a variety of fax features.
NOTE: The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under
Country. If Country is not set up, a message Set The Country
Code appears on the display.
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
Values:
Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The
Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also
supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.
Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest
resolution supported by the receiving device.
Original Type
Purpose:
To select the default document type.
Values:
Text* Suitable for documents with text.

Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Values:
Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter1
Darker1 Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print
Darker2 or faint pencil markings.
Delayed Start
Purpose:

This feature enables you to set a specific time for the fax transmission to
start. Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all of the
documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time.
After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is
cleared.
Values:
21:00*/PM9:00* Specify the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a
0:00 - 23:59 / specified time.
AM/PM1:00 -
12:59
NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer.
USB Print Defaults
Layout
Purpose:
To automatically enlarge print documents when you print directly from a
USB storage device.
Values:
Auto* Automatically enlarges print documents to fit on the paper.

Off Does not enlarge print documents.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper
loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
MPF
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).

Values:
Paper Size A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1

A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Envelope #10 (4.1 x 9.5")
Monarch Env. (3.9 x 7.5")
Monarch Env. L (7.5 x 3.9")
DL Env. (110 x 220 mm)
DL Env. L (220 x 110 mm)
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)
Custom Portrait (Y) 297 Specifies the
Size mm*/11.7inch* length of the
127 - 355 custom size
mm/5.0-14.0 paper.
inches
Landscape(X) 210 mm*/8.3 Specifies the
inch* width of the
77 - 215 custom size
mm/3.0-8.5 paper.
inches

Paper Type Plain*
Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain S2
Plain Thick S2
Covers S2
Coated
S2
Recycled S2
Display Popup Off Does not display a popup menu.
On* Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to
set Paper Size and Paper Type when
the paper is loaded in the MPF.
*1
The default for Paper Size varies depending on country-specific
factory default.
NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes"
on page 196.
Reports/List
Use the Reports/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.
System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the information such as the printer name, service tag, the
status of the printer, consumables, and the network settings.
Panel Settings
Purpose:

To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.
Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been
processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.
Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
Color Test Page

Purpose:
To print a page for testing colors.
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.
Address Book
Purpose:
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.
Admin Menu
Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel
Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the password you specified,

Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial
settings.
Speed Dial
Purpose:
To store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
See also:
"Storing a Number for Speed Dialing" on page 311.
Group Dial
Purpose:
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial
code. Up to 6 group dial codes can be registered.
See also:
"Setting Group Dial" on page 314.
Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to
the printer through the wired or wireless network.
Ethernet
Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
Auto* Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.

10BASE-T Half Uses 10base-T half-duplex.
10BASE-T Full Uses 10base-T full-duplex.

100BASE-TX Uses 100base-TX half-duplex.
Half
100BASE-TX Uses 100base-TX full-duplex.
Full
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wired
network.
Status (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)

Purpose:
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. No changes can be
made on the operator panel to improve the status of the wireless connection.
Values:
Good Indicates good signal strength.

Acceptable Indicates marginal signal strength.
Low Indicates insufficient signal strength.
No Reception Indicates that no signal is received.
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless
network.
Wireless Setup (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)

Purpose:
To configure the wireless network interface.
Values:

Manual Enter Specify a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32
Setup Network alphanumeric characters can be entered.
(SSID)
Infrastruct Select when you configure the wireless setting through the
ure access point such as a wireless router.
No Specify No Security to configure the wireless
Security setting without specifying a security method from
WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA-PSK-AES.
WEP Specify the WEP 64bit Key to use through the
(64Bit) wireless network. Up to 10 hexadecimal characters
can be entered.
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP
Key Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and
WEP Key 4.
can be entered.
WEP Key 4.

WPA- Select to configure the wireless setting with the
PSK- security method of WPA-PSK-TKIP.
TKIP Pass Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric
Phrase characters from 8 to 63 only when
Entry WPA-PSK-TKIP is selected for
Encryption.
WPA2- Select to configure the wireless setting with the
PSK-AES security method of WPA2-PSK-AES.
Pass Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric
Phrase characters from 8 to 63 only when
Entry WPA-PSK-AES is selected for
Encryption.
Ad-hoc Select to configure the wireless setting without the access
point such as a wireless router.
No Specify No Security to configure the wireless
Security setting without specifying the security method
from WEP.
can be entered.
WEP Key 4.
can be entered.
WEP Key 4.

WPS Push PBC No* Disables the security method of WPS-
Button Start PBC.
Control Yes Configures the wireless setting with the
security method of WPS-PBC.
PIN Code Start Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code
Configur assigned automatically by the printer.
ation
Print Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when you enter
PIN the PIN code to your computer.
Code
network.
Reset Wireless (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)

Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and
rebooting the printer, all wireless network settings are reset to their default
values.
No* Does not reset the wireless setting.

Yes Resets the wireless setting.
network.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings. The change becomes effective after the printer
is turned off and then on.
Values:
IP Dual Stack* Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
Mode IPv4 Mode Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.

IPv4 Get IP AutoIP* Automatically sets the IP address.
Address BOOTP Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
RARP Uses RARP to set the IP address.
DHCP Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Panel Enables the IP address entered on the operator
panel.
IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.
Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.
Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address.
Protocol
Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the
printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
LPD Disable Disables the LPD port.

Enable* Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.
Port9100 Disable Disables the Port9100 port.
Enable* Enables the Port9100 port.
WSD Disable Disables the WSD port.
Enable* Enables the WSD port.
SNMP Disable Disables the SNMP UDP port.
Enable* Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) UDP port.
E-Mail Alerts Disable Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.
Enable* Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.
EWS Disable Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Enable* Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool embedded in the printer.

LLTD Disable Disables the LLTD.
Enable* Enables the LLTD.
Bonjour (mDNS) Disable Disables the Bonjour (mDNS).
Enable* Enables the Bonjour (mDNS).
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize wired network data stored in NVM (non-volatile memory). After
executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings
are reset to their default values.
No* Does not initialize the wired network data stored in NVM.
Yes Initializes the wired network data stored in NVM.
Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
Receive Mode
Purpose:
To select the default fax receiving mode.
Values:
TEL Mode Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by
picking up the handset of the external telephone, pressing the
remote receive code, and then pressing .
FAX Mode Automatically receives faxes.
TEL/FAX When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone
Mode rings for the time specified in Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then
the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a
fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the
call is a telephone call.

Ans/FAX Mode The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine.
In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the
line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication is using
serial transmission in your country (such as Germany, Sweden,
Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), this
mode is not supported.
DRPD Mode Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)
option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone
company has provided a separate number for faxing with a
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
Auto Rec Fax

Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
receiving an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0
to 255 seconds. The default is 0 second.
Auto Rec TEL/FAX

Purpose:
the external telephone receives an incoming call. The interval can be
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 6 seconds.
Auto Rec Ans/FAX

Purpose:
the external answering machine receives an incoming call. The interval can be
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 21 seconds.
Line Monitor
Purpose:
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Values:

Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor.
Low Sets the volume of the line monitor.
Medium*
High
Ring Tone Volume

Purpose:
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.
Values:
Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone.

Low Sets the volume of the ring tone.
Medium
High*
Line Type
Purpose:
To select the line type.
Values:
PSTN* Sets the line type to PSTN.

PBX Sets the line type to PBX.
Tone/Pulse
Purpose:
To select the dialing type.
Values:

Tone* Sets the dialing type to Tone.
Pulse(10PPS) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).
Pulse(20PPS) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).
Resend Delay
Purpose:
To specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to
255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.
Redial Attempts
Purpose:
To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax
number is busy, within the range of 0 to 9. If you enter 0, the printer will not
redial. The default is 3.
Redial Delay
Purpose:
To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15
minutes. The default is 1 minute.
Junk Fax Setup

Purpose:
To reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the
fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.
Off* Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.
Remote Receive
Purpose:

To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone
after picking up the handset of the telephone.
Values:
Off* Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the
external telephone.
On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external
telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone

Purpose:
To specify the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header
Purpose:
To print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Values:
Off Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
On* Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Company Name
Purpose:
To set the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30
Fax Number
Purpose:
To set the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page

Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

Values:
Off* Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

On Attaches a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern
Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Values:

Pattern 1-7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD
Patterns are specified by your telephone company. The patterns
provided with your printer are shown below:
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Pattern 5
Pattern 6
Pattern 7
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to

use this service. For example, Pattern 7 is the New Zealand
FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400ms, stops for
800ms, rings for 400ms and stops for 1400ms. This pattern is
repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to
Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.

Forward Settings
Purpose:
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Values:
Off* Does not forward incoming faxes.

Forward Only Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Print and Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.
Forward
Fax Fwd Number

Purpose:
To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be
forwarded.
Prefix Dial
Purpose:
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.
Values:
Off* Does not set a prefix dial number.

On Sets a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num

Purpose:
To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any
auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic
Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size
Purpose:

To set whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the
entire page does not fit onto the output paper.
Values:
Off* Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.
On Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.
Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.
ECM
Purpose:
To set whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the
ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Values:
Off Disable the ECM.

On* Enables the ECM.
Modem Speed
Purpose:
To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error
occurs. Values:
2.4 Kbps
4.8 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
33.6 Kbps*
Fax Activity
Purpose:

To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Values:
Auto Print* Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming
and outgoing fax communications.
No Auto Print Does not automatically print a fax activity report.
Fax Transmit
Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or
only when an error occurs.
Values:
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error* Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
Fax Broadcast
Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to
multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Values:
Print Always* Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to
multiple destinations.
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:

To set whether to print a protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the
cause of a communication problem.
Values:
Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable* Does not print a protocol monitor report after a fax transmission.
Country
Purpose:
To select the country where the printer is used.
System Settings
Use the System Settings menu to configure to configure a variety of
printer features.
Power Saver Timer

Purpose:
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.
Options:
Mode 1 5min* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it

5–30min enters the power saver timer mode 1 after it finishes
a job.
Mode 2 6min* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it
1–6min enters the power saver timer mode 2 after it goes into
the power saver mode 1.
Enter 5 in Mode 1 to put the printer in the power saver timer mode five
minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warm-
up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with
room lighting and you notice lights flickering.

Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances,
this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a
value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a
balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver
timer mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the
printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
Auto Reset
Purpose:
To automatically reset the settings for COPY, SCAN, or FAX to the defaults
and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the
specified time.
Values:
45sec*
1min
2min
3min
4min
Fault Time-out
Purpose:
To specify the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop
abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Options:
Off Disables the fault time-out.

On* 60 sec* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it
3–300 sec cancels for jobs that stop abnormally.
Job Time-out
Purpose:

To specify the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from
the computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Options:
Off Disables the job time-out.

On 30 sec* Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to
5–300 sec arrive from the computer.
Date & Time

Purpose:
Values:

Date Format*1 YY/MM/DD Specifies the date format.
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM/YY
Time Format 12H Specifies the time format.
24H
*1 The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory
default.
Alert Tone
Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or
when a warning message appears.
Values:

Panel Select Tone Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel
input is correct.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the
Medium operator panel input is correct.
High
Panel Alert Tone Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel
input is incorrect.
Medium operator panel input is incorrect.
High
Auto Clear Alert Off* Does not emit a tone before the printer performs
auto clear.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds
Medium before the printer performs auto clear.
High
Job Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job
Medium* is complete.
High
Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when a
Medium* problem occurs.
High
Out of Paper Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out
of paper.
Medium* printer runs out of paper.
High

All Tones Off Disables all the alert tones.
Low Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.

Medium*
High
mm/inch
Purpose:
To specify the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the
operator panel.
Values:
Millimeters Specifies the default measurement unit.

(mm)
Inches (")
NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory

default.
Auto Log Print

Purpose:
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Values:
Off* Does not automatically print a job history report.

On Automatically prints a job history report.
NOTE: The job history report can also be printed using the Report List
menu.
NOTE: If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.
Low Toner Alert Msg

Purpose:

To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Values:
Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.
On* Shows the alert message when the toner is low.
Power on Wizard
Purpose:
To perform initial setup for the printer.
Values:
Yes Performs the initial setup for the printer.

No* Does not perform the initial setup for the printer.
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize NVM (non-volatile memory),
configure the plain paper quality adjustment settings, and configure the
security settings.
F/W Version
Purpose:
To display the version of the controller.
Service Tag
Purpose:
To display the service tag of the printer.
Express Code
Purpose:
To display the express service code of the printer.

Paper Density
Purpose:
Values:
Plain Light
Normal*
Label Light
Normal*
Adjust BTR
Purpose:
values.
Values:
Plain 0*
-3 – +3
Plain Thick 0*
-3 – +3
Covers 0*
-3 – +3
Coated 0*
-3 – +3
Label 0*
-3 – +3

Recycled 0*
-3 – +3
Envelope 0*
-3 – +3
Adjust Fuser
Purpose:
Values:
Plain 0*
-3 – +3
Plain Thick 0*
-3 – +3
Covers 0*
-3 – +3
Coated 0*
-3 – +3
Label 0*
-3 – +3
Recycled 0*
-3 – +3
Envelope 0*
-3 – +3

Auto Regi Adjust
Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Values:
Off Does not automatically adjust color registration.

On* Automatically adjusts color registration.
Adjust ColorRegi
Purpose:
To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the
printer or when the printer is moved to a different location.
NOTE: This item is available only when Auto Regi Adjust is set to Off.
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Yes Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.

No* Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Toner Refresh
Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its
life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Yellow Yes Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

No* Does not clean the toner in the yellow toner
cartridge.

Magenta Yes Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
No* Does not clean the toner in the magenta toner
cartridge.
Cyan Yes Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
No* Does not clean the toner in the cyan toner
cartridge.
Black Yes Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge.
No* Does not clean the toner in the black toner
cartridge.
BTR Refresh
Purpose:
Specify whether to execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge
of the paper.
Values:
Off* Does not automatically execute counter measures for

curling/separating discharge of the paper.
On Automatically executes counter measures for curling/separating
discharge of the paper.
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters, Address
Book data for fax, or Address Book data for e-mail. After executing this
function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to
their default values.
Values:
User Fax Yes Initializes the fax number entries in the Address
Section Book.
No* Does not initialize the fax number entries in the
Address Book.

User Scan Yes Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in
Section the Address Book.
No* Does not initialize the e-mail and server address
entries in the Address Book.
System Section Yes Initializes the system parameters.
No* Does not initialize the system parameters.
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
the printer.
Values:
Off* Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

On Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
Values:

0m* Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
1000m
2000m
3000m
Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the
menus. This prevents items from being changed accidentally.
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password.
For details see "Panel Lock Function" on page 405.
NOTE: You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Function
Enabled are set to On and Secure Receive Set is set to Disable.
Values:
Panel Lock Set Disable* Does not restrict access to Admin Menu with a
password.
Enable Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.
Change Password 0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to access
Admin Menu.
Function Enabled
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a
password to use the services, and to set or change the password.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Function Enabled only when
Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Values:

Copy On Enables the Copy service.
Off Disables the Copy service.
On Enables the Copy service with a black and white
(Password) mode, but requires a password.
On (Color Enables the Copy service with a color mode, but
Password) requires a password.
FAX On Enables the Fax service.
Off Disables the Fax service (the printer will not send
or receive faxes).
On Enables the Fax services, but requires a password
(Password) to send faxes (does not require a password to
receive incoming faxes).
SCAN On Enables the Scan service.
Off Disables the Scan service.
On Enables the Scan service, but requires a password.
(Password)
USB-Print On* Enables the USB-Print service.
Off Disables the USB-Print service.
On Enables the USB-Print service with a black and
(Password) white mode, but requires a password.
On (Color Enables the USB-Print service with a color mode,
Password) but requires a password.
Change Password Sets or changes the password required to use the
Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services.
Secure Receive
Purpose:
To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes, and to set or
change the password. When Secure Receive Set is set to Enable, the
printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is
entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Secure Receive Set only
when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.

Values:
Secure Receive Set Disable* Does not require a password to print incoming
faxes.
Enable Requires a password to print incoming faxes.
Change Password 0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to print
incoming faxes.
Scan to EMail
Use the Scan to EMail menu to edit the transmission source.
Edit From Field
Disable Disables editing of the transmission source.

Enable* Enables editing of the transmission source.
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB
port.
USB Port
Purpose:
To enable or disable the USB interface. The change becomes effective after
the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
Enable* Enables the USB interface.

Disable Disables the USB interface.

Panel Language
Purpose:
To specify the language to be used on the operator panel.
Values:
English*
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska
Panel Lock Function

This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing settings made by the
administrator. However, you can select settings for individual print jobs using
the printer driver.
Enabling the Panel Lock

button.
the button.
press the button.
5 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the button.
6 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the
button.

7 Press the button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the
button.
NOTE: The factory-default panel password is 0000.
NOTE: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below
allows you to reset the password, but the settings for Address Book and
Phone Book are cleared.
• Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the (Menu) button, turn on
the printer.
NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform
steps 1 to 5. Press the button until Change Password is highlighted, and
then press the button. Enter the new password, and then press the
button. This will change the password.
Disabling the Panel Lock

button.
the button.
4 Enter the password, and then press the button.
press the button.
6 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the button.
7 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the
button.
8 Press the button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the
button.

Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters
or data are reset to their default values.
button.
button.
4 Press the button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
the button.
5 Press the button until Initialize NVM is highlighted, and then
press the button.
6 Press the button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press
the button.
7 Press the button until Yes is highlighted, and then press the
button.


21
Understanding Your Printer
Software (Windows Only)
Use the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer to install a
combination of software programs, depending on your operating system.
Printer Status Window

The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an
error occurs, for example, when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low.
By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs.
When an error occurs, the error message appears on the Printer Status
window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when
printing in Printing Status Window Properties.
You can also check the toner level of your printer.
Status Monitor Console

Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status
Window for a particular printer.
Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name
to open a Status Window for a particular printer.
Dell Supplies Management System

You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the
All Programs menu or the desktop icon.
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.
Color Printer Dell Supplies Management System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If you are ordering from the web:
a Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only) 409

b Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
Dell 1355cn Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System
window appears.
c Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK.
If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone
section.
Software Update
The firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell
Support website located at support.dell.com.
Quick Launch Utility

Using the Quick Launch Utility window, you can open the Status Window,
Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, ScanButton
Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility
when you install the Dell software.
To open the Quick Launch Utility window:
Color Printer Quick Launch Utility.
The Quick Launch Utility dialog box opens.
410 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)

2 The Quick Launch Utility window provides seven buttons; Status
Window, Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor,
ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To exit, click the X button at the top-right of the window.
For details, click the Help button of each application.
Status Window Click to open the Printing Status window. See "Printer
Status Window" on page 409.
Tool Box Click to open the Tool Box. See "Understanding the Tool
Box Menus" on page 323.
Updater Click to update the Dell software and printer firmware.
Troubleshooting Click to open the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you
to resolve issues by yourself.
Address Book Editor Click to open the Address Book Editor, which allows you to
create and edit Address Book entries.
ScanButton Manager Click to open the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to
specify how the ScanButton Manager behaves for scan
events that the device generates.
Dell ScanCenter Click to open the Dell ScanCenter.

Address Book Editor
2 3
1
4
1 Read the Device Address Book entries from the printer to the Address Book
Editor and read the PC Fax Address Book entries from the PC to the Address
Book Editor.
2 Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box.
3 Deletes a selected Address Book entry.
4 Displays Address Book entries.
NOTE: You must install the fax driver before reading or editing the Address Book
entries.
For more information about Address Book Editor, see the Help of Address
Book Editor.

ScanButton Manager
The Scan to Application stores the image files in the My Documents
folder by default, and then you can open them using the related application.
Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the obtained
image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related
application.
ScanDirect
ScanDirect is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send
them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without
running the PaperPort program first. For more information about using
ScanDirect, refer to PaperPort's Help menu.
User Setup Disk Creating Tool

The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder
of the Utilities folder on the Drivers and Utilities CD and the printer drivers
located on the Drivers and Utilities CD are used to create driver installation

packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package
can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and other data for things
such as:
• Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)
• Watermarks
If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple
computers running on the same operating system, create a setup disk in a
floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have
created will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer
driver.
• Install the Dell™ 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer driver in the
computer on which the setup disk is to be created.
• The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk
was created or computers running the same operating system. Create a
separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.

22
Understanding Printer Messages
The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of
the printer and indicates possible printer problems you must resolve. This
chapter describes messages, their meanings, and how to clear the messages.
NOTICE: When an error code is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer
and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secured.
1 Data LED 2 Ready / Error LED*1

3 buttons 4 buttons
5 button 6 (Cancel) button
7 (Start) button 8 (Back) button
9 AC (All Clear) button 10 (Backspace) button
11 LCD Panel 12 (Menu) button
*1 The Error LED is on the right and blinks when an error occurs.
Understanding Printer Messages 415

Error-Code What you can do
001-360 Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,
003-340 contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.
003-356
005-121 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the
ADF" on page 461.
005-301 Close the ADF cover.
007-371
009-360 Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner
009-361 Cartridge" on page 442.
009-362
009-363
010-377
016-315
016-317
016-338
016-344
016-347
016-354
016-355
016-370
016-372
016-374
016-375
016-376
016-377
416 Understanding Printer Messages

016-503 Press the button. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set
correctly.
016-504 Press the button. Check if user name and password for POP3
server and DNS server are set correctly.
016-507 Press the button. Check if user name and password used for
SMTP server are set correctly.
016-700 Press the button to cancel the current print job.
016-701
016-720
016-744 Press the button. Contact Dell if this message appears
016-745 repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.

016-764 Press the button. Contact SMTP server administrator.
016-766
016-767 Press the button. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.
016-794 Press the button to clear the message.
016-795
016-797
016-920 Press the button. Execute the operation again according to the
operation procedure.
016-985 Press the button. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution
017-970 setting or changing the file format of the scanned image.

017-981
017-988
024-914 Load the specified paper. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media
in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.

024-969 Load the appropriate paper. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media
in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.
026-721
026-722
026-723
026-750
026-751
026-752
027-446 Change IP address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and
027-452 turn it on again.
031-521 Press the button. Confirm login-able computer with your

system administrator.
031-526 Press the button. Check DNS connection, or check if
forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.
031-529 Press the button. Check if password is correct.
031-530 Press the button. Check if storage location is correct. Storage
location you specified is DFS setting, and check if it is linked to
other server. Specify directly linked server, share name, and storage
location.
031-533 Press the button. Check the following:
031-534 • If the file name you specified is not used by other users.
• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified
already exists.
031-535 Press the button. Check if other user is not operating file in
031-536 storage location you specified.
031-537 Press the button. Check if storage location has free space.
031-556
031-557 Press the button. Change the file name that already exists on
FTP server.

031-571
031-574 Press the button. Check DNS connection, or check if name of
forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.
031-575 Press the button. Set DNS address, or set forwarding
destination server address as IP address.
031-576 Press the button. Check if the printer communicates with
forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check connection of
network cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.
031-578 Press the button. Check if login name (user name) and
password are correct.
031-579 Press the button. Check if storage location is correct.
031-582 Press the button. Check if the file name you specified can be
created in storage location. Check if storage location has free space.
031-584 Press the button. Check if the folder name you specified can be
created in storage location. Check if the folder that has the same
name as the one you specified already exists.
031-585 Press the button. Check server access rights.
031-587
031-588 Press the button. Check if storage location has free space.
031-594 Press the button. Execute the operation again according to the
operation procedure. Contact Dell if this message appears
repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.
031-598 Press the button. Check append access right to the file and if
server supports FTP append command.
033-513 Press the button. Print the received fax, or wait for a while until
sending a fax is completed.
033-517 Press the button. Check if password is correct.
033-518 Press the button. Check if your country code is set correctly.

033-787
033-788 Press the button. Remove the received fax, or wait for a while
until sending a fax is completed. Press the button to clear the
message.
034-700 Press the button to clear the message. Check that the phone
034-701 line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone Line" on
page 48.
034-702
034-703
034-704
034-705
034-706
034-707
034-708
034-709
034-710
034-711
034-712
034-713
034-714
034-715
034-716
034-717
034-718
034-719
034-720
034-721
034-722
034-723
034-724

034-725
034-726
034-727
034-750
034-751
034-752
034-753
034-754
034-755
034-756
034-757
034-758
034-759
034-760
034-761
034-762
034-763
034-764
034-765
034-766
034-767
034-768
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.
062-790 Press the button.
075-100 Check and clear the paper path, load the specified paper, and then
press the button. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of
the Printer" on page 465.
075-921 Load paper for the second side (odd) pages, and press the
button. See Figure "Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer
Driver Only)" on page 218.

077-100 Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 459.
077-101
Back of the Printer" on page 467.
077-105
077-300 Close the rear cover.
Output Tray" on page 470.
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.
092-310 Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density
(CTD) Sensor" on page 448.
093-423 Replace the specified toner cartridge soon. Order a new consumable
093-424 from www.dell.com/supplies.
093-425 See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.
093-426
093-919 Re-install or replace the specified toner cartridge. See "Replacing
093-920 Toner Cartridges" on page 441.
093-921
093-922
093-930 Remove the specified toner cartridge and install a new one. If you do
093-931 not replace the toner cartridge, print quality problems may occur.
Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.
093-932
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.
093-933
093-960 "Replace the specified toner cartridge with the supported one. Order
093-961 a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.
093-962 See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.
093-963

093-970 Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner
093-971 Cartridge" on page 442.
093-972
093-973
117-333
117-334
117-340
117-342
117-343
117-344
117-346
117-348
117-349
117-350
117-351
117-366
191-310
193-700 This message indicates the printer is in the non-Dell toner mode.


23
Printing with Web Services on
Devices (WSD)
This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the new
Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and
Windows® 7 protocol of Microsoft®.
Adding Roles of Print Services

When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need
to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008 or Windows
Server 2008 R2 client.

1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the
Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
5 Click Install.

1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles
window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4 Click Next.
5 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
6 Click Install.
Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD) 425

Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities
CD that shipped with your printer, or using Microsoft's Windows Add Printer
wizard.
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard

1 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers (Start
Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
2 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4 In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then
click Next.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form
of http://IP address/ws/.
NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address
manually to create a WSD printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually,
follow the instructions below. For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD
printer, you must be a member of Administrators group.
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and
click Next.
NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer? wizard on Windows
Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of the followings:
• Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your
computer.
• Add the printer driver to your computer in advance.
5 If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are
prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
6 Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
7 Print a test page to verify print installation.
426 Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)

a Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers
(Start Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and
Windows 7).
b Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Properties
(Printer properties for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
On the Options tab, set each setting item, and then click Apply.
c On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page is printed
successfully, installation is complete.
Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD) 427

428 Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)

24
Specifications
Operating System Compatibility
Your Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer is compatible with
Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server®
2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows
Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,
Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Mac OS® X 10.4.11/10.5.6, 10.6.x
or later.
1
Dell technical phone support only supports factory-installed operating
systems (Microsoft) for the first 30 days for free. See
http://www1.us.dell.com/content/products/compare.aspx/laser?c=us&cs=
555&l=en&s=biz for more details. The customer will have to purchase
technical support from the manufacturer of the operating system in order to
get technical assistance beyond 30 days.
2 If the customer has other operating systems and has purchased Gold
Technical Support (for more information on Gold Technical Support, see
http://www1.us.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/services/en/gts?c=
us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz), the telephone support will be a "best effort"
attempt to resolve the operating system issue. If the manufacturer needs to be
contacted, the customer must pay an additional fee for that support. The only
time that Dell pays for the third party support is when Dell is responsible for
the issue. In the case of getting the printer installed and working, this is
configuration and the customer would be responsible for paying.
Power Supply
Rated Voltage 220-240 VAC 110-127 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Current 5.0 A 11.0 A
Specifications 429

Dimensions
Height: 338 mm (13.31 inches) Width: 410 mm (16.14 inches) Depth: 379
mm (14.92 inches)
Weight (only the toner cartridges are included):
• 1355cn: 14.8 kg (32.63 lb)
• 1355cnw: 14.9 kg (32.85 lb)
Memory
Base memory 128 MB
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation,

Operating System, and Interface
PDL/Emulations Host-based printing system

OSes Microsoft Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista,
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows
Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit
Edition, Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Mac OS X
Version 10.4.11, 10.5.8, and 10.6
Interfaces Standard local: USB 2.0
Standard network: 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g
(Wireless)
MIB Compatibility
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information
about network devices (such as adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This
information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze
performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw
430 Specifications

Multifunction Color Printer complies with standard industry MIB
specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various
printer and network management software systems.
Environment
Operation
Temperature 10-32°C
Relative humidity 10-85% RH (no condensation)
Print Quality Guarantee
Temperature 15-28°C
Relative humidity 20-70% RH (no condensation)
Storage
Temperature range -20-40°C

Storage humidity range 5-80% RH (no condensation)
Altitude
Operating Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)

Storage 70.9275 Kpa
NOTE: For more information on adjusting the altitude, see "Adjust Altitude" on
page 340.
Cables
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:
Specifications 431

Connection type Connection specifications and symbols
1 Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX
2 USB USB 2.0
3 Wall Jack Connector
4 Phone Connector
2
3
4
Copier Specifications
Item Description
Copy Resolution Optical: 600x600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch),
ADF: 600x300 dots/25.4mm (1 inch)
(Same for Color/Black&White)
432 Specifications

Item Description
Copy Speed Color 12 cpm or more, Black&White 15 cpm or more
(When using the document glass to make sequential
copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)
Color 2.87 cpm or more, Black&White 10.64 cpm or
more (When using the ADF to make sequential copies
of multiple documents.)
Paper Size A4, A5, B5, Executive, Letter, Folio, Legal, Monarch,
DL, C5, Envelope #10
Zoom Rate Document glass: 25% - 400%, ADF: 25% - 400%
Multiple copies 1 - 99 pages
Copy mode (=Original Text, Text & Photo, Photo
Type)
Scanning method Platen: Document-fixed flatbed scanning method
ADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning
method (one side scanning)
Scanner Specifications
Item Description
Compatibility Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN),
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)
Scan Resolution TWAIN: 75 x 75 to 4800 x 4800 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
WIA: 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm
(1 inch)
Resolutions other than the following are achieved by
driver's resolution conversion:
200 x 200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
300 x 300 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch) (Default)
600 x 600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
1200 x 1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
Color bit depth 24 bit (WIA, TWAIN)
Mono bit depth 1 bit for Line art and 8 bit for Gray scale
Specifications 433

Item Description
Effective scanning length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Effective scanning width 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Scan speed (Text mode) Black&White:
641.22 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
1265.19 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))
Color:
2176.52 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
4363.36 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))
Facsimile Specifications
Item Description
Compatibility ITU-T Group 3
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Data coding Black&White: 1bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding
Color: Not supported
Max modem speed 33.6 Kbps
Transmission speed Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to
memory transmission of text data scanned in Standard
resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.
Scanning speed Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax
resolution mode) ADF: approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at
standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at
fine fax resolution mode)
Maximum document length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)
Paper size Letter, A4, Legal
434 Specifications

Item Description
Resolution Standard: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 3.85 lines/mm
(98 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 100 dpi
Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 7.7 lines/mm (196
lines/inch)
200 dpi x 200 dpi
Super Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm
(391 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 400 dpi
Ultra Fine: 16 pels/mm (406 pels/inch) x 15.4
lines/mm (391 lines/inch)
400 dpi x 400 dpi
User Memory 2 MB
Halftone 256 levels
Specifications 435

436 Specifications

Maintaining Your Printer
437

438

25
Maintaining Your Printer
Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain
optimum print quality. If several people are using the printer, you may want to
designate a key operator to maintain your printer. Refer printing problems
and maintenance tasks to this key operator.
Determining the Status of Supplies

If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool can provide instant feedback on remaining toner levels. Type the
printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use the
E-Mail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new
supplies, type your name or the name of the key operator in the e-mail list
box.
On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:
• Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing
(However, the printer can only display information about one item at a
time.)
• Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge
Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner
cartridge and paper.
Supply Setting Function

Toner Toner Saving Mode in This check box allows the users to select a
cartridge the Graphics tab of the print mode that uses less toner. When this
printer driver feature is used, the image quality will be lower
than when it is not used.
Maintaining Your Printer 439

Supply Setting Function
Print Multiple Up in the The printer prints two or more pages on one
media Layout tab of the printer side of a sheet. The available numbers that
driver each printer driver can print one sheet of paper
are as follows:
• Windows Printer Driver: 2, 4, 8, or 16 pages
• Macintosh Printer Driver: 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16
pages
Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple
Up allows you to print up to 32 pages on one
sheet of paper. (16 images on the front and 16
on the back)
Storing Print Media

To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are
several things you can do.
• To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an
environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the
relative humidity is 40%.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the
floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton,
ensure that they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do
not store consumables in:
• Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).
• An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
• Direct sunlight.
• Dusty places.
• A car for a long period of time.
440 Maintaining Your Printer

• An environment where corrosive gases are present.
• An environment with salty air.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
CAUTION: Before replacing toner cartridges, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Product Information Guide.
Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more
cartridges online at http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by
phone, see "Contacting Dell" on page 504.
It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell
does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories,
parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
CAUTION: Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could
explode resulting in burns and injuries.
CAUTION: Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of toner.
Removing the Toner Cartridges

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Open the toner access cover.
3 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION: Always pull the cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner.
4 Pull the toner cartridge out.
Installing a Toner Cartridge

1 Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color and shake it five to six
times to distribute the toner evenly.

NOTE: Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the
handle before replacing it.
NOTE: Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spillage of the toner.
2 Remove the tape from the toner cartridge.
3 Adjust the toner cartridge to the associated cartridge holder, and then
insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label until the cartridge
clicks.

4 Close the toner access cover.
Cleaning Inside the Printer
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
1 Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the toner access
cover.

2 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.
3 Pull the toner cartridge out.

4 Pull the other three cartridges out as well.
5 Pull the cleaning rod out.
6 Insert the cleaning rod fully into the hole beside the arrow on the printer
until its tip reaches the interior of the printer as illustrated below, and then
pull it out.

7 Repeat the same procedure for the other three holes.
8 Return the cleaning rod to its original location.
9 Replace the black cartridge by adjusting it to the associated cartridge

holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label
until the cartridge clicks.

10 Replace the other three cartridges as well.
11 Close the toner access cover.
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor
Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the
Status Monitor or operator panel.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

3 Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab.
4 Close the rear cover.

Adjusting Color Registration
This section describes how to adjust the color registration when you first
install the printer or after moving it to a new location.
Performing Auto Adjust

Auto Adjust allows you to correct the color registration automatically.
The Operator Panel

button.
the button.
4 Press the button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press
the button.
5 Press the button until Adjust ColorRegi is highlighted, and then
press the button.
6 Ensure that Auto Adjust is highlighted, and then press the
button.
7 Ensure that Are you sure? is highlighted, and then select Yes by
pressing the button.

Auto adjust is performed.
The Tool Box

NOTE:
NOTE: The Select Printer window is highlighted in this step, when multiple
printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of
Dell 1355 Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
3 Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4 Uncheck the check box next to On.
5 Click the Start button next to Auto Correct.
The color registration is corrected automatically.
Printing the Color Registration Chart
The Tool Box

NOTE:
The Tool Box opens.
4 Uncheck the check box next to On.
5 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart.

The color registration chart is printed.
Determining Values
On the color registration chart printed, find the straightest lines where the
two black lines and the colored line are most closely aligned for each color (Y,
M, and C).
If you find the straightest line, make a note of the value (-5 - +5) indicated by
the straightest line for each color.
When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color
registration.
When the value is not 0, enter the value according to the procedure in
"Entering Values" on page 453.

Entering Values
The Tool Box

NOTE:
Using the Tool Box, enter the values that you found in the color registration
chart to make adjustments.
The Tool Box opens.

4 Select the value with the straight line, and then click the Apply New
Settings button.
5 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.
6 Adjust until all straight lines are at the value of 0. Show image of before
and after adjustment will help.
NOTICE: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until
the printer motor has stopped running.
Cleaning the Scanner

Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is
recommended to clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the
day, as needed.
1 Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
3 Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and
dry.

1
4 2
1 White Strip
2 White Document Cover
3 Document Glass
4 ADF Glass
4 Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until
they are clean and dry.

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller
Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is
recommended to clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals.
1 Open the ADF cover.
2 Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until
it is clean.
If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may
also be soiled. In this case, slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper
towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the
contamination from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.



26
Clearing Jams
Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to
avoid most jams. See "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189 for more
information.
NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that
you try a sample first.
Avoiding Jams
• Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" on
page 189 for more information.
• See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202
and "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211
to load print media properly.
• Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the stack print
media height does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load
line labels in the tray.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
• Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs
with print media, try feeding one sheet at a time through the single sheet
feeder.
• Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media
source.
• Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the
print media. Also, the recommended print side should be face down when
using the single sheet feeder.
• Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more
information, see "Storing Print Media" on page 196.
• Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.
• Push the tray in firmly after loading.
Clearing Jams 459

• Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams

CAUTION: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may
permanently damage the printer.
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print
media path.
3
1 2
7 6 5
1 Scanner Unit
2 Fuser
3 Fuser Release Lever
4 Rear Cover
460 Clearing Jams

5 ADF Cover
6 Front Cover
7 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF
When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document

Feeder (ADF), remove jams in the following procedure.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The
fuser becomes extremely hot during use.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print
media from the print media path.
1 Open the ADF cover.
2 Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of

the arrow shown in the following illustration.
Clearing Jams 461

3 If you find it difficult to pull the document, open the document feeder
tray.
4 Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.
462 Clearing Jams

5 Close the document feeder tray.
6 Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.
Clearing Jams 463

NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-
size document.
7 If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output
tray or cannot find any jammed document there, open the document
output tray.
8 Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by
carefully pulling the document in the direction of the arrow shown in the
following illustration.
464 Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer
1 Pull the PSI out.
Clearing Jams 465

2 Remove any paper jammed from the front of the printer.
3 Replace the PSI in the printer.
466 Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer
Clearing Jams 467

2 Lift up the fuser release levers.
3 Remove any paper jammed from the back of the printer.
468 Clearing Jams

4 Lower the fuser release levers to their original position.
Clearing Jams 469

Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray
470 Clearing Jams

2 Lift up the fuser release levers.
3 Remove any paper jammed from the back of the printer. If no paper is
found in the paper path, face the front of the printer and check the output
tray.
Clearing Jams 471

4 Lift and open the scanner unit.
5 Remove any paper jammed out of the output tray.
472 Clearing Jams

6 Lower and close the scanner unit.
7 Lower the fuser release levers to their original position.
Clearing Jams 473

474 Clearing Jams

Troubleshooting
475

476

27
Troubleshooting
Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your
printer, check each of the following:
• The power cable is connected to the printer, and to a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
• The printer is turned on.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
• When your printer is connected to the network with the Ethernet cable,
the USB cable is not connected between the printer and the computer.
• When your printer is connected to the computer with the USB cable, the
Ethernet cable is not connected between the printer and the network.
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the
printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. This often fixes the
problem.
Display Problems
Problem Action
After the printer is turned • Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on
on, the display on the the printer.
operator panel is blank, keeps • Self Test Message appears on the operator panel.
showing the DELL logo, or When the test is completed, Ready is displayed.
the back light is not lit.
Troubleshooting 477

Problem Action
Menu settings changed from Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or
the operator panel have no the printer utilities have precedence over the settings
effect. made on the operator panel.
Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the
printer utilities, or the software program instead of the
operator panel.
Printing Problems
Problem Action
Job did not print or incorrect Ensure that Ready appears on the operator panel
characters printed. before you send a job to print.
Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer.
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB
cable and that it is securely connected to the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler
has not stalled.
Check the interface of your printer from the Admin
Menu.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a
device settings page to verify that the current interface
settings are correct. Refer to "Printing a System
Settings Page" on page 232 for details on how to print
a device settings page.
478 Troubleshooting

Problem Action
Print media misfeeds or Ensure that the print media you are using meets the
multiple feeds occur specifications for your printer. See "Supported Paper
Sizes" on page 196 for more information.
Fan the print media before loading it.
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Ensure that the width and length guides are adjusted
correctly.
Ensure that the PSI is securely inserted.
Do not overfill the print media sources.
Do not force print media into the Priority Sheet
Inserter (PSI) or the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
when you load it. Otherwise, it may skew or buckle.
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Load the recommended print side correctly for the
type of print media you are using. See "Loading Print
Media" on page 201 for more information.
Turn the print media over or around and try printing
again to see if feeding improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream
before loading the print media.
Load a print media source only when it is empty.
The envelope is creased after Ensure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in
printing. "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.
Page breaks in unexpected Increase the setting for Time-Out in the Printer
places. Settings menu in the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
Print media does not stack Turn the print media stack over in the PSI and MPF.
neatly in the output bin.
Troubleshooting 479

Problem Action
Printer does not duplex Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from
pages. the Duplex menu on the Paper/Output tab in the
printer driver.
Print Quality Problems

NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be
performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For
information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see
"Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 and "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool" on page 123.
The output is too light
Action Yes No
1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is Go to action 2.
replaced. Confirm the amount of toner in each complete.
toner cartridge.
1 Check the toner level in the Status tab in the
Status Monitor.
2 Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Is the problem recovered?
2 Verify that the print media is not damp and the The task is Go to action 3.
correct print media is used. See "Supported complete.
Paper Sizes" on page 196. If not, use the print
media recommended for the printer.
480 Troubleshooting

Action Yes No
3 Verify that the Paper Type setting in the printer The task is Contact Dell.
driver matches the print media you loaded. complete.
1 On the Paper/Output tab in Printing
Preferences of the printer driver, check the
Paper Type setting.
2 Load dry (not damp) and corrected print
media, and then click Print Test Page in
Properties of the printer driver.
Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side
Action Yes No
1 The print media surface may be uneven. Try The task is Go to action 2.
changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete.
driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
Preferences of the printer driver, change the
Paper Type setting.
2 Verify that the correct print media is being The task is Go to action 3.
used. See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 196. complete.
If not, use the print media recommended for
the printer.
Troubleshooting 481

Action Yes No
3 Adjust the fuser temperature. The task is Contact Dell.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Fuser complete.
on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up
the value for your printing media.
3 Click Apply New Settings.
4 Click close box to exit Tool Box.
Random spots/Blurred images
Action Yes No
1 Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed The task is Go to action 2.
correctly. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on complete.
page 442.
2 If you use non-Dell brand toner cartridges, The task is Go to action 3.
install Dell brand toner cartridges. complete.
482 Troubleshooting

Action Yes No
3 Clean up the fuser unit. The task is Contact Dell.
1 Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then complete.
print a solid image all over paper.
2 Load the printed sheet with the side to be
printed on facing down, and then print a blank
sheet of paper.
The entire output is blank
If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.
Streaks appear on the output
Troubleshooting 483

Pitched color dots
Vertical blanks
Action Yes No
1 Clean inside the printer and performing test The task is Contact Dell.
print. complete.
1 Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning
rod. See "Cleaning Inside the Printer" on
page 444.
2 Click Print Test Page in Properties of the
printer driver.
484 Troubleshooting

Ghosting
Action Yes No
1 Adjust the transfer bias. The task is Go to action 2.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on complete.
the Diagnosis tab.
2 Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.
The ghost configuration chart is printed.
3 Launch the Tool Box, and click BTR Refresh
Mode on the Printer Maintenance tab.
4 Check the check box next to On, and then
click Apply New Settings.
5 Click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
6 Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.
The ghost configuration chart is printed.
2 The print media surface may be uneven. Try The task is Go to action 3.
changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete.
driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
Preferences of the printer driver, change the
Paper Type setting.
Troubleshooting 485

Action Yes No
3 Adjust the fuser temperature. The task is Go to action 4.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Fuser complete.
on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up
the value for your printing media.
3 Click Apply New Settings.
4 Click close box to exit Tool Box.
4 If you use non-recommended print media, use The task is Contact Dell.
the print media recommended for the printer. complete.
Fog
Action Yes No
1 Is the whole page printed light? Contact Dell. Go to action 2.
2 Start Clean Developer. The task is Contact Dell.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean complete.
Developer on the Diagnosis tab.
2 Click the Start button.
486 Troubleshooting

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)
Action Yes No
1 If the printer is installed in a high altitude The task is Contact Dell.
location, set the altitude of the location. complete.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust
Altitude on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Select the value close to the altitude of the
location where the printer is installed.
Auger mark
Troubleshooting 487

Action Yes No
1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is Contact Dell.
replaced. Confirm the amount of toner in each complete.
toner cartridge.
1 Check the toner level in the Status tab in the
Status Monitor.
2 Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
2 Start Clean Developer. The task is Contact Dell.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean complete.
Developer on the Diagnosis tab.
2 Click the Start button.
Wrinkled/Stained paper
Action Yes No
1 Verify that the correct print media is being The task is If printing on
used. See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 196 complete. an envelope, go
and "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189. If to action 2.
not, use the print media recommended for the If printing on
printer. print media
Is the problem recovered? other than
envelopes,
contact Dell.
488 Troubleshooting

Action Yes No
2 Check the crease. Is the crease within 30 mm of This type of If the envelope
the four edges of the envelope? crease is is 220 mm or
considered longer (C5 or
normal. Your Envelope#10),
printer is not at go to action 3a.
fault. If the envelope
is shorter than
220 mm
(Monarch or
DL), go to
action 3b.
3a Does the envelope have a flap on the long edge? The envelope is The envelope
Envelope#10. is C5. Go to
Go to 4b. action 4a.
3b Load the envelope long edge feed in the MPF The task is Go to action
with the flap open and facing up. For details, complete. 4b.
see "When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or
Monarch" on page 207.
4a Load the envelope in the MPF with the flap The task is Contact Dell.
open and facing up. For details, see "When complete.
Loading C5" on page 208.
4b Use a different size envelope. The task is Contact Dell.
Is the problem recovered? complete.
The top margins is incorrect
Troubleshooting 489

Action Yes No
1 Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the The task is Contact Dell.
application being used. complete.
Color registration is out of alignment
Action Yes No
1 Execute auto color registration adjustment. The task is Go to action 2.
1 Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration complete.
Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.
2 Clean the CTD sensor. The task is Go to action 3.
1 Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the complete.
Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor" on
page 448.
2 Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration
Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.
490 Troubleshooting

Action Yes No
3 Print the color registration chart and manually The task is Contact Dell.
correct the color registration. complete.
1 Click Registration Adjustment on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
2 Click the Start button next to Print Color
Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed.
3 Adjust till all straight lines are at the value of
0. See "Adjusting Color Registration" on
page 450 for details.
4 Click the Apply New Settings button.
5 Click the Start button next to Print Color
Regi Chart to print the color registration chart
again.
Protrudent / Bumpy paper
Action Yes No
1 Clean up the fuser unit. The task is Contact Dell.
1 Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then complete.
print a solid image all over paper.
2 Load the printed sheet with the side to be
printed on facing down, and then print a blank
sheet of paper.
Troubleshooting 491

Jam
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be
performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For
information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see
"Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 and "Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool" on page 123.
Misfeed jam
Action Yes No
1 Remove the paper from the PSI, and then The task is Proceed to the
ensure that papers are properly inserted on the complete. action
MPF. corresponding
Is the problem recovered? to the type of
the print media
being used:
• Thick - 2a
• Thin - 2b
• Envelope -
2c
If performing
manual duplex
printing, go to
action 2d.
If using paper
other than the
above or if not
performing
duplex
printing, go to
action 2e.
2a Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less. The task is Go to action
Is the problem recovered? complete. 3a.
2b Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more. The task is Go to action

492 Troubleshooting

Action Yes No
2c Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in The task is Go to action
the MPF as instructed in "Loading an Envelope complete. 3b.
in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on
page 207.
2d Ensure that the print media is not curled. The task is Go to action
2e Is the print media damp? Go to action Go to action

3c. 3a.
3a Fan the print media. The task is Go to action
Is the problem recovered? complete. 3b.
3b If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use The task is Go to action

another envelope. complete. 3a.
3c Turn over the print media. The task is Go to action 4.
4 Use print media that is not damp. The task is Contact Dell.
Multi-feed jam
Action Yes No
1 Remove the paper from the PSI, and then The task is Go to action 2.
ensure that papers are inserted properly in the complete.
MPF.
2 Is the print media damp? Go to action Go to action
3a. 3b.
3a Use print media that is not damp. The task is Go to action
Is the problem recovered? complete. 3b.
Troubleshooting 493

Action Yes No
3b Fan the print media. The task is Contact Dell.
A document jam occurs in the ADF if scanning of multiple-sheet document

is cancelled while scanning is in progress.
Action Yes No
1 Clear the jam. See "Clearing Paper Jams From The task is Contact Dell.
the ADF" on page 461. complete.
Copy Problem
Problem Action
A document loaded in the Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
ADF cannot be copied.
Fax Problems
Problem Action
The printer is not working, Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
there is no display and the Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.
buttons are not working.
No dial tone sounds. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 48.
Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by
plugging in another phone.
494 Troubleshooting

Problem Action
The numbers stored in the Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory
memory do not dial correctly. correctly.
Print a Address Book list.
The document does not feed Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are
into the printer. putting it in correctly. Check that the document is of
the right size, not too thick or thin.
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received The FAX mode should be selected.
automatically. Ensure that there is paper in the PSI or MPF.
Check to see if the display shows Memory Full.
The printer does not send Sending should show up on the display.
faxes. Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see
if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
spaces or is received in poor- A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
quality.
Check your printer by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner
cartridge. For details, see "Replacing Toner Cartridges"
on page 441.
Some of the words on an The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary
incoming fax are stretched. document jam.
There are lines on the Check your scan glass for marks and clean it. See
documents you send. "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.
The printer dials a number, The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper,
but the connection with or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other
another fax machine fails. machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the
problem.
Documents are not stored in There may not be enough memory to store the
the memory. document. If the display shows a Memory Full
message, delete any documents you no longer need
from the memory and then restore the document, or
wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax transmission or
reception) to complete.
Troubleshooting 495

Problem Action
Blank areas appear at the You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the
bottom of each page or on user option setting. See "Print Media Guidelines" on
other pages, with a small page 189.
strip of text at the top.
The printer will not send or Ensure that the country code is set correctly under
receive faxes. (Menu)  System Admin Menu  Fax
Settings  Country.
Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 48.
An error often occurs during Reduce the modem speed under (Menu) 
a fax transmission or System  Admin Menu  Fax Settings 
reception. Modem Speed.
Scanning Problems
Problem Action
The scanner does not work. Ensure that you place the document to be scanned
face down from the document feeder glass, or face up
in the ADF.
There may not be enough available memory to hold
the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan
function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan
resolution rate.
Check that the USB cable is connected properly.
Ensure that the USB cable is not defective. Switch the
cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the
cable.
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check
the application you want to use to make certain that
the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
496 Troubleshooting

Problem Action
The printer scans very slowly. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when
using the Scan to E-mail or Scan to Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory required to
analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time
than scanning at a low resolution.
Document misfeeds or Ensure that the document’s paper type meets the
multiple feeds occur in the specifications for the printer. See "Supported Paper
Automatic Document Feeder Types" on page 198 for more information.
(ADF). Check whether the document is properly loaded in the
ADF.
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted
properly.
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not
exceed the maximum capacity of the ADF.
Ensure that the document is not curled.
Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.
Vertical stripes appear on the Clean the ADF glass.
output when scanned using See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.
the ADF.
A smear appears at the same Clean the document glass.
location on the output when See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.
scanned using the document
glass.
Images are skewed. Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the
ADF or on the document glass.
Diagonal lines appear jagged If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from
when scanned using the the document glass.
ADF.
Troubleshooting 497

Problem Action
The printer does not properly Check if the following settings have been set correctly
transfer scan data to a on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
specified destination via the
Scan to E-mail or Scan to
Network feature. Scan to Network
Check the following settings under Address Book 
Server Address:
• Server Address
• Share Name
• Server Path
• Login Name
• Login Password
Scan to E-mail
Check the following setting under Address Book 
Fax/E-Mail:
• E-Mail Address
Cannot scan using WIA on a Enable WIA on the computer.
Windows Server 2003 To enable WIA:
computer.
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then
click Services.
2 Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and
then click Start.
Cannot scan using TWAIN Install the Desktop Experience feature on the
or WIA on a Windows Server computer.
2008 or Windows Server To install Desktop Experience:
2008 R2 computer.
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then
click Server Manager.
2 Under Features Summary, click Add Features.
3 Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next,
and then click Install.
498 Troubleshooting

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
Problem Action
Unable to retrieve the Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly
Address Book data from the connected with the USB cable.
printer on the Address Book Ensure that the printer’s power is on.
Editor.
Ensure that the printer driver is installed on your
computer. (The Address Book Editor retrieves the
Address Book data via the printer driver.)
The TWAIN driver cannot Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly
connect to the printer. connected with the USB cable.
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on,
reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on
again.
If a scan application is running, close the application
once, restart the application, and then try scanning
again.
The scanner driver has not Install the scanner driver. If the driver is installed,
been registered on your uninstall it and then reinstall it.
computer and cannot be
accessed from ScanButton
Manager.
Failed to scan your Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly
document on the printer via connected with the USB cable.
ScanButton Manager. Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on,
reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on
again.
If a scan application is running, close the application
once, restart the application, and then try scanning
again.
Failed to create an image file Ensure that there is sufficient space in your hard disk.
via ScanButton Manager. Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
then reinstall it.
Failed to initialize Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
ScanButton Manager. then reinstall it.
Troubleshooting 499

Problem Action
Failed to execute ScanButton Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
Manager. then reinstall it.
An unexpected error Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and
occurred on ScanButton then reinstall it.
Manager.
Other Problems
Problem Action
Condensation has occurred This usually occurs within several hours after you heat
inside the printer. the room in winter. This also occurs when the printer is
operating in a location where relative humidity reaches
85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the
printer to an appropriate environment.
No file is displayed on the Confirm that there are files with the supported file
operator panel when you are formats (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG) in the USB storage
selecting a file for Printing device.
from USB Memory feature. If the target file is in a deep hierarchy in the USB
storage device, move the file to the root directory in
the USB storage device with your computer.
Shorten the target file name in the USB storage device
with your computer, and try printing again.
Contacting Service
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are
experiencing or the error message on the display.
You need to know the model of your printer and serial number. See the label
located inside the side door of your printer.
500 Troubleshooting

Appendix
501

502

B
Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and
participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for
restoration of the operating system, software program and hardware drivers to
the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the
verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed
hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online
technical support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support
options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed
software and peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is
provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or
installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and
Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Online Services
You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:
www.dell.com
www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only)
You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail
addresses:
• Dell Support websites
support.dell.com
Appendix 503

support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
• Dell Support e-mail addresses
mobile_support@us.dell.com
support@us.dell.com
la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
• Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses
apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)
sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only)
• Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.
Warranty and Return Policy

Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products
from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance
with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for
your printer, see support.dell.com.
Recycling Information
It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers,
and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of
parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/or materials.
For specific information on Dell's worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/
recyclingworldwide.
Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-Dell (800-999-3355).
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact
information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, in your Dell catalog.
504 Appendix

Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options.
Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be
available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or
customer service issues:
1 Visit support.dell.com.
2 Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down
menu at the bottom of the page.
3 Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.
4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.
Appendix 505

506 Appendix

Index
Numerics Administrator Password, 178

100Base-TX Full-Duplex, 167 Alert Tone, 139, 147, 393
100Base-TX Half-Duplex, 167 All Tones, 140, 148
10Base-T Full-Duplex, 167 Altitude, 431
10Base-T Half-Duplex, 167 Ans/FAX Mode, 291
Answer Machine/Fax, 153
Appendix, 503
A
Apply New Settings, 132
A4, 196
Asset Tag Number, 137
A5, 196
Authenticate Error Trap, 177
About printer, 33
Auto Clear Alert Tone, 139, 148
AC (All Clear) button, 224, 415
Auto Exposure, 140, 142, 150,
Address Book, 125, 131, 147, 152, 244, 362, 367
179, 374
Auto Log Print, 140, 148, 395
Address Book Editor, 412
Auto Rec Ans/FAX, 292, 382
ADF Cover, 34, 36, 461
Auto Rec Fax, 291, 382
ADF Glass, 455
Auto Rec TEL/FAX, 291, 382
Ad-Hoc, 168
Auto Receive Answer/Fax, 142,
Adjust Altitude, 145, 158, 340, 154
401
Auto Receive Fax, 142, 153
Adjust BTR, 145, 156, 337, 397
Auto Receive Tel/Fax, 142, 153
Adjust ColorRegi, 399
Auto Regi Adjust, 399
Adjust Fuser, 145, 156, 338, 398
Auto Registration
Adjusting Color Adjustment, 145, 157
Registration, 450
Auto Reset, 139, 147, 392
Admin Menu, 374
Index 507

Automatic Document Feeder Changing the settings of menu
(ADF), 33, 36 item, 133
Automatic Redialing, 302 Chart Print, 356
Avoiding Jam, 229, 459 Clean Developer, 157-158, 356,
399
Clearing jam, 459
B From ADF, 461
B&W / Color LED, 224 Clearing Paper Jam
B5, 196 From ADF, 461
From Back of the Printer, 467
Back button, 224, 415
From Front of the Printer, 465
Backspace button, 224, 415 From Output Tray, 470
Base memory, 430 Clock Mode, 289
Basic Information, 165 Clock Settings, 146, 159
Basic printer problem, 477 Coated, 145, 156-157, 337-338,
Blue plug, 48 397-398
Bonjour(mDNS), 163, 167 Collated, 141, 151, 239, 359
BTR Refresh, 400 Color, 140, 142, 150-151, 238,

359, 365
BTR Refresh Mode, 341
Color Balance, 363
Color Button Set, 365
C Color Mode button, 224
C5, 196 Color Registration
Adjustment, 157
Cable, 431
Color Registration Chart, 451
Cancel button, 224, 415
Color Test Page, 374
Canceling a job, 230
Community Name (Read
Canceling print job
only), 176
From computer, 230
Community Name
Carbonless copy paper, 191
(Read/Write), 176
CCP, 191
Community Name (Trap), 176
508 Index

Company Name, 292, 385 D
Completed Jobs, 125, 138 Data LED, 223, 415
Configuring Wireless Date & Time, 336, 393
Settings, 85
Date Format, 146
Connecting Printer, 43
Defaults Settings, 329
Connection specification, 43,
Delayed Start, 142, 152, 370
432
Connection type, 43, 432 Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, 123, 126
Conserving supplies, 439 Page display format, 129
Contact Dell Support at, 126, Dell Service Tag Number, 137
131
Dell Supplies Management
Contact Person, 130 System, 409
Contacting Service, 500 Dell Technical Support
Contacts button, 224 Policy, 503
Control Panel Tone, 139, 147 Demo Page, 147
Copy button, 223 Details, 137
Copy Color Balance, 141, 150 Determining Values, 452
Copy Defaults, 140, 348 DHCP, 162, 172
Copy Problem, 494 Dimensions, 430
Copy Service Lock Set, 140, 149 Direct Fax, 303
Copy Settings, 141 Discard Size, 144, 155, 293, 388
Country, 144, 155, 293 Display Popup, 146
Cover, 136 Display Problem, 477
Covers, 145, 156-157, 337-338, DL, 197
397-398 DL LEF, 197
CTD Sensor, 448 DNS, 162, 172
Custom Reduce/Enlarge, 150 Document Feeder Tray, 33, 36
Document Glass, 36, 455
Index 509

Document Guides, 36 Environment Sensor Info, 356
Document Output Tray, 33 Environment settings of your
web browser, 127
Document Size, 140, 142,
150-151, 241, 361, 366 Error History, 147, 374
Document Type, 298 Ethernet, 161, 167, 432
Driver, 25 Ethernet Port, 34, 44
Drivers and Utilities CD, 25 EWS, 345, 380
DRPD, 153 EWS Settings, 166
DRPD Mode, 291 Executive, 197
DRPD Pattern, 143, 154, 292, Express Code, 396
386
F
E F/W Version, 396
ECM, 144, 155, 293, 389 Fault Time-Out, 392
Edit From Field, 404 Fax Activity, 144, 155, 293, 374,
E-Mail Alert, 126, 131, 167, 173, 389
380
Fax Broadcast, 144, 155, 293,
E-Mail Alert Settings, 165, 175 390
E-Mail Alert Setup, 123 Fax button, 223
E-mail Alert Setup Page, 164 Fax Cover Page, 143, 154, 292,
385
E-Mail Server Settings, 164, 174
Fax Defaults, 142, 152, 347
Emulations, 430
Fax Forward Number, 143, 154
Encryption, 161, 169
Fax Fwd Number, 293, 388
Entering Values, 453
FAX Group, 181
Envelope, 145, 156-157, 194,
337-338, 398 Fax Group, 182
Envelope #10, 197 Fax Header, 143, 154, 292, 385
Environment, 431 Fax Header Name, 143, 154
510 Index

Fax Number, 143, 154, 292, 385 Host Name, 138, 162, 171
Fax Problems, 494 How to set up, 26
Fax Protocol, 144, 155 How to use, 25
Fax Service Lock Set, 140, 149 HTTP, 163, 172
Fax Settings, 142, 153, 331, 351,
381
FAX Speed Dial, 182 I
Fax Transmit, 144, 155, 293 ID, 137-138
File Format, 142, 151, 365 Identifying Print Media, 196
Finding Information, 25 Identifying Print

Specification, 196
Firmware Version, 137
Image Compression, 142, 152,
Folio, 197 369
Forward Settings, 292, 388 Impression Number, 138
Front Cover, 33, 461 Infrastructure, 168
Front USB Port, 33 Initialize NIC NVM and restart
FTP Client, 163 printer, 178
Function Enabled, 149, 402 Initialize NVM, 400
Fuser, 460 Installing
Printer drivers, 69
Fuser Release Lever, 34, 460
Installing a Toner Cartridge, 442
Interfaces, 430
G IP Address, 130, 162, 171
Gateway Address, 162, 171 IP address, 162
Group Dial, 375 IP Address Mode, 162, 171
Group Dialing, 313 IP Mode, 162, 171
IPv4, 162, 171-172, 177
H IPv6, 162, 171-172, 177
Host I/F, 138
Index 511

J Lighter/Darker, 140, 142,
150-152, 243, 299, 362, 367,
Jam, 492 370
Job History, 147, 374
Line Monitor, 143, 154, 292, 382
Job List, 125, 137 Line Type, 143, 154, 292, 383
Job Name, 138 Link Channel, 161, 168
Job Status, 138
Link Quality, 161, 168
Job Submitted Time, 138 Liquid crystal display, 223
Job Time-Out, 140, 148
LLTD, 163
Job Time-out, 392 Loading Envelope, 207
Job Tone, 139, 147 Loading Letterhead, 193, 210,
Job Type, 138 217
Junk Fax Setup, 143, 154, 292, Loading Paper, 59
353, 384 Loading Print Media, 201
MPF, 202
PSI, 211
K
Loading Print Media in
Kensington lock, 37 Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF), 59, 202
Loading Print Media in Priority
L Sheet Inserter (PSI), 66, 211
Label, 144-145, 156-157, 195, Location, 130, 137
337-338, 397-398
Low Toner Alert Msg, 395
LCD, 223 LPD, 163, 167, 172, 380
LCD Panel, 225, 415
Left frame, 130
Legal, 197 M
Length Guide, 33 MAC Address, 161, 168
Letter, 197 Maintenance, 439

Manual Duplex Printing, 218
512 Index

Margin Left/Right, 141-142, Network Connection Setup, 74
151-152, 248, 364, 368
Network Firmware Version, 137
Margin Middle, 141-142, Network printing, 69
151-152, 249, 364, 368
Network Type, 161, 168
Margin Top/Bottom, 141-142,
151-152, 247, 363, 368 New Password, 149
Max E-Mail Size, 142, 152 No carbon required, 191
Max EMail Size, 369 No. of Sheets, 138
Memory, 430 Non-Dell Toner, 145, 159, 341,
401
Memory Capacity, 137
Number of Copies, 238
Menu button, 225, 415
Numeric keypad, 224
Menu Item, 133
Menu Settings, 139, 324
MIB Compatibility, 430 O
mm/inch, 140, 148, 395 OCR, 191
Modem Speed, 144, 155, 293, One Touch Dial button, 223
389
Online Help, 126, 131
Monarch, 197
Online Services, 503
Monarch LEF, 197
Operating System
MPF Extension, 33 Compatibility, 429
Multiple Up, 440 Operation, 431
Multiple-Up, 141, 151, 245, 363 Operator Panel, 33, 223
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF), 33, Button, 223
461 Optical character
recognition, 191
Order Supplies at, 126, 131
N
Original Type, 140, 150, 242, 361
NCR, 191
OS, 430
Network, 375
Other Features, 178
Index 513

Out of Paper Tone, 139, 147 Parts name, 33
Output Result, 138 PDL, 430
Output Tray, 136 Peer-to-Peer, 112
Output Tray Extension, 221 Phone Book, 375
Owner, 138 Phone Connector, 34, 44, 48, 432
Plain, 144-145, 156-157,
337-338, 397-398
P Plain Thick, 145, 156-157,
Page Display Format, 129 337-338, 397-398
Panel Alert Tone, 139, 147 Point and Print, 109
Panel Language, 140, 148, 405 Port Settings, 163, 166
Panel Lock, 402, 405 Port Status, 163, 167
Panel Lock Set, 140 Port9100, 163, 167, 172, 380
Panel Settings, 147, 373 Power on Wizard, 396
Panel Settings Page, 225 Power Saver Time, 391
Paper, 189 Power Saver Timer, 250
Characteristics, 189 Power Saver Timer - Deep
Curl, 189 Sleep, 139, 147
Fiber Content, 190
Power Saver Timer - Sleep, 139,
Grain Direction, 190
147
Moisture Content, 190
Smoothness, 190 Power Supply, 429
Weight, 189 Power Switch, 33
Paper Chute, 34 Prefix, 293
Paper Density, 144, 155, 336, 397 Prefix Dial, 143, 155, 293, 388
Paper Feed Roller, 34 Prefix Dial Num, 388
Paper jam location, 460 Prefix Dial Number, 144, 155,
293
Paper Type, 198
Premier, 146
Paper Used, 179
Print Cartridge Level, 136
Paper Width Guides, 33
514 Index

Print from USB, 140, 149 Printer Software, 409
Print Head Cleaning Rod, 33 Printer specification, 429
Print Media Printer Status, 125, 131, 135-136
Dimensions, 201 Printer Type, 136
Print media, 189, 440 Printing, 229
Print Quality Guarantee, 431 Printing on Letterhead, 192
Print Quality Problems, 480 Printing problem, 478
Print Server Reports, 161 Printing Speed, 136
Print Server Settings, 125, 131, Printing Status Window, 409
160, 165
Printing with WSD, 425
Print Server Setup Page, 161
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), 33
Print Volume, 125, 131, 179
Processor Speed, 137
Printer Driver Pre-install
Status, 69 Product Features, 29
Printer Drivers (Macintosh) Product Information Guide, 26

Installing Printer Drivers, 117 Protocol Monitor, 293, 374
Printer Drivers Installing, 69
Printer Events, 136
Q
Printer Information, 126, 131,
137, 323 Quick Launch Utility, 410
Printer Jobs, 125, 131, 137 Quick Reference Guide, 25
Printer Maintenance, 155

Printer Media, 189 R
Printer Page Count, 179
Ready / Error LED, 223, 415
Printer Revision Levels, 137
Rear Cover, 34, 460
Printer Serial Number, 137
Receive Mode, 142, 153, 291,
Printer Settings, 125, 131, 138, 381
147
Recommended Paper, 190
Printer Settings Report, 139
Recycled, 145, 156, 337-338, 398
Index 515

Recycling Information, 504 Return Policy, 504
Re-dial / Pause button, 224 Right Frame, 132
Redial Attempts, 143, 154, 292, Ring Tone Volume, 143, 154,
384 292, 383
Redial Delay, 143, 154, 292, 384 Ringer Volume, 290
Reduce/Enlarge, 140, 150, 240,
360
Re-enter Password, 149 S
Refresh, 132 Safety information, 26
Refresh Mode, 357 Scan button, 225
Registration Adjustment, 338 Scan Defaults, 142, 151, 345
Regular, 146 Scan Service Lock Set, 140, 149
Relative humidity, 431 Scan To Network, 142, 151, 364
Remote Rcv Tone, 292, 385 Scan to PC, 177
Remote Receive, 143, 154, 292, ScanButton Manager, 413

384 ScanDirect, 413
Remote Receive Tone, 143, 154 Scanner Driver/Printer Utility
Removing the Toner Problems, 499
Cartridges, 441 Scanner Unit, 460
Report Page, 232 Scanning Problems, 496
Reports, 146, 327 Secure Receive, 149, 403
Resend Delay, 143, 154, 292, 384 Secure Receive Set, 140, 149
Reset Defaults, 158, 340 Secure Settings, 140, 148, 402
Reset Print Server, 178 Security Settings, 169
Reset Wireless, 379 Security Slot, 34
Resetting Defaults, 357, 407 Select Reorder URL, 146
Resolution, 142, 151-152, 298, Selecting Letterhead, 192
366, 369
Selecting Paper, 191
Restore Settings, 132
Selecting Preprinted Media, 192
516 Index

Selecting Pre-Punched Speed Dial button, 224
Paper, 193
SSID, 161, 168
Sending a Fax, 296 Start, 224
Sending a Fax Start button, 224, 415
Automatically, 299
Status Messenger, 167
Sending a Fax Manually, 300
Status Monitor Console, 409
Sending print job, 229
Status of printer supplies, 439
Sent Fax Forward, 143, 154
Storage, 431
Server Address, 184-185
Storage humidity range, 431
Service Code, 27
Storing consumables, 440
Service Tag, 27, 396
Storing Print Media, 196, 229,
Set Date, 146 440
Set Password, 126, 131, 178 Support
Set Time, 146 Contacting Dell, 504
Setting, 439 Supported Paper Size, 196
Setting Copy Options, 238 System Settings, 139, 146-147,
Setting the Printer ID, 287 166, 333, 373
Setting the Time and Date, 288 System Settings page, 146
Setting Your Country, 286 system settings page, 124
Setup diagram, 26
Sharpness, 140, 142, 150, 152, T
244, 362, 367
TCP/IP, 170
SMB Client, 164
TCP/IP Settings, 162, 171, 328,
SNMP, 163, 167, 175 342
SNMP UDP, 380 TCP/IP settings page, 124
Software Update, 410 TEL Mode, 291
Speaker Volume, 289 TEL/FAX Mode, 291
Speed Dial, 375 Telephone, 153
Index 517

Telephone/Fax, 153 USB Settings
Temperature, 431 USB Port, 404
Time Format, 146 USB storage device, 280
Time Zone, 146 User Setup Disk Creating

Tool, 413
Time-Out, 163, 173
Using Dell Printer Configuration
Tone/Pulse, 143, 154, 292, 383 Web Tool, 125
Toner Access Cover, 33
Toner Refresh, 158, 399
W
Top frame, 129
Wall Jack Connector, 34, 44, 48,
Transfer Belt, 34
432
Transfer Roller, 34
Warranty, 504
Transmit Key, 161
Warranty information, 26
Trap Notification (IP), 177
Web Link Customization, 146,
Tray 1 Custom Size - X, 146 160, 342
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y, 146 WEP 128 Bit ASCII (13
Tray 1 Paper Size, 146 Bytes), 169
Tray 1 Paper Type, 146 WEP 128 Bit Hex (26 Bytes), 169
Tray Settings, 126, 131, 146, 186, WEP 64 Bit ASCII (5 Bytes), 169
328, 371 WEP 64 Bit Hex (10 Bytes), 169
TWAIN, 255 White Document Cover, 455
White Strip, 455
Width guide, 205
U
Windows Image Acquisition
Unacceptable Paper, 191 (WIA), 257
UNITED STATES
Wired Network
GOVERNMENT
Ethernet, 375
RESTRICTED RIGHTS, 22
Initialize NVM, 381
USB, 432 Protocol, 380
USB port, 34, 44 Wireless LAN, 167
518 Index

Wireless Settings, 161, 168
Wireless Setup, 376
WPA2-PSK AES, 169
WPA-RSK TKIP, 169
WSD, 163, 167, 173
Y
Yellow terminator, 49
Index 519

520 Index

Dell 1355 Color Laser Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dell 1355 Color Laser Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dell 1355 Color Laser Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction

Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color

User's Guide .................................................1

Before Beginning .......................................19

A Notes, Notices, and Cautions . . . . . . . . . 21

1 Dell™ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer

4 About the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Securing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Setting Up Printer (Printer Setup) ...........39

5 Removing Packaging Material . . . . . . . . 41

6 Connecting Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Turning On the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

7 Setting the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode) . . . . . . . . 53

Verifying the IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page . . . . 57

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 66

9 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running

Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Direct Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Network Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color

Setting Up for Shared Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running

Using Your Printer ...................................121

11 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . 123

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . 125

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . 126

Page Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . 133

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

12 Print Media Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Identifying Print Media and Specifications . . . . . . 196

13 Loading Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Print Media Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 202

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 211

Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer Driver Only) 218

Using the Output Tray Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

14 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Printing a Panel Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 227

Sending a Job to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Printing a Report Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Preparing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Making Copies From the Document Glass . . . . . . . 235

Making Copies From the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Setting Copy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

This manual downloaded from http://www.manualowl.com

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option . . . . . . . . . 250

Scanning From the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 254